Generator Protection Relay

Instruction Book
Part 1 of 2
M-3425A
Generator Protection
Generator Protection
M-3425A
Integrated Protection System
for Generators of All Sizes

Unit shown with optional M-3925A Target Module and M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Module.
PROTECTION
Exceeds IEEE C37.102 and Standard 242 requirements for generator
protection
Protects generators of any prime mover, grounding and connection type
Provides all major protective functions for generator protection including
Out-of-Step (78), Split-Phase Differential (50DT), Under Frequency Time
Accumulation (81A), Inadvertent Energizing (50/27) and Turn-to-Turn Fault
(59X)
Expanded IPScom
Communications Software provides simple and logical

setting and programming, including logic schemes
Simple application with Base and Comprehensive protection packages
Load encroachment blinders and power swing blocking for system
backup protection (21) to enchance security during system abnormal
conditions
Options: Ethernet Connection, Field Ground/Brush Lift-Off
Protection (64F/B), Sync Check (25), 100% Stator Ground
Fault Protection by low frequency injection (64S) and
Expanded I/O (15 additional Output Contacts and 8 additional
Control/Status Inputs)
2
M-3425A Generator Protection Relay
Optional Protective Functions
Sync Check with Phase Angle, V and F
with dead line/dead bus options (25)
Field Ground (64F) and Brush Lift Off (64B)
(Includes M-3921 Field Ground Coupler)
100% Stator Ground protection by low fre-
quency injection (64S). The following equip-
ment is supplied with the 64S option:
20 Hz signal generator (430-00426)
Band-pass Filter (430-00429)
400/5 A 20 Hz CT (430-00428)
Standard Features
Eight programmable outputs and six pro-
grammable inputs
Oscillographic recording with COMTRADE
or BECO format
Time-stamped target storage for 32 events
Metering of all measured parameters and
calculated values
Three communications ports (two RS-232
and one RS-485)
M-3820D IPScom
Communications Soft-
ware
Incl udes MODBUS and BECO 2200
protocols
Standard 19" rack-mount design (vertical
mounting available)
Removable printed circuit board and power
supply
50 and 60 Hz models available
Both 1A and 5 A rated CT inputs available
Additional trip inputs for externally connected
devices
IRIG-B time synchronization
Operating Temperature: 20 C to +70 C
Sequence of Events Log
Trip Circuit Monitoring
Breaker Monitoring
Four Setpoint Groups
Optional Features
Redundant power supply
M-3925A Target Module
M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
Module
RJ45 Ethernet port utilizing MODBUS over TCP/
IP and BECO2200 over TCP/IP protocols
RJ45 Ethernet port utilizing IEC 61850 Protocol
M-3801D IPSplot
PLUS Oscillograph Analy-

sis Software
Expanded I/O (15 additional outputs and 8
additional inputs)
Protective Functions
Base Package
Overexcitation (V/Hz) (24)
Phase Undervoltage (27)
Directional power sensitive triple-setpoint Re-
verse Power, Low Forward Power or Over-
power detection, one of which can be used for
sequential tripping (32)
Dual-zone, offset-mho Loss of Field (40), which
may be applied with undervoltage controlled
accelerated tripping
Sensitive Negative Sequence Overcurrent pro-
tection and alarm (46)
Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (50)
Inadvertent Energizing (50/27)
Generator Breaker Failure (50BF)
Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50N)
Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51N)
Three-phase Inverse Time Overcurrent
(51V) with voltage control and voltage restraint.
Phase Overvoltage (59)
Neutral Overvoltage (59N)
Multi-purpose Overvoltage (59X)
VT Fuse-Loss Detection and blocking
(60FL)
Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N)
Four-step Over/Underfrequency (81)
Phase Differential Current (87)
Ground (zero sequence) Differential Cur-
rent (87GD)
IPSlogic takes the contact input status and
function status and generates outputs by
employing (OR, AND, and NOT) boolean
logic and a timer.
Protective Functions
Comprehensive Package
The Comprehensive Package includes all Base
Package functions, as well as the following:
Three-zone Phase Distance protection for
phase fault backup protection (21). Zone three
can be used for Out-of-Step Blocking. Load
encroachment blinders can be applied.
100% Stator Ground Fault protection using Third
Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage (27TN) or (59D)
Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (ratio)
Stator Overload (49) (Positive Sequence
Overcurrent)
Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) can be used
for split phase differential
Out-of-Step (78)
UnderFrequency Accumulation (81A)
Rate of Change of Frequency (81R)
3
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Device Setpoint
Number Function Ranges Increment Accuracy
Phase Distance (three-zone mho characteristic)

Circle Diameter #1,#2,#3 0.1 to 100.0 0.1 0.1 or 5%
(0.5 to 500.0 ) (0.5 or 5%)
Offset #1,#2,#3 100.0 to 100.0 0.1 0.1 or 5%
(500.0 to 500.0 ) (0.5 or 5%)
Impedance Angle #1,#2,#3 0 to 90 1 1
Load Encroachment Blinder #1,#2,#3
Angle 1 to 90 1 1
R Reach 0.1 to 100
Time Delay #1,#2,#3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Out-of-Step Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Overcurrent Supervision 0.1 to 20 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 2%
(0.02 to 4 A) 0.01 A 0.02 A or 2%
When out-of-step blocking on Zone 1 or Zone 2 is enabled, Zone 3 will not trip and it will be used to detect the
out-of-step condition for blocking Function 21 #1 and/or 21 #2.
Volts / Hz
Definite Time
Pickup #1, #2 100 to 200% 1% 1%
Time Delay #1, #2 30 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 25 Cycles
Inverse Time
Pickup 100 to 200% 1% 1%
Characteristic Curves Inverse Time #1#4
Time Dial: Curve #1 1 to 100 1
Time Dial: Curves #2#4 0.0 to 9.0 0.1
Reset Rate 1 to 999 Sec. 1 Sec. .02 Sec. or 1%
(from threshold of trip)
The percent pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal system frequency settings. The
pickup accuracy stated is only applicable from 10 to 80 Hz, 0 to 180 V, 100 to 150% V/Hz and a nominal voltage
setting of 120 V.
Phase Undervoltage
Pickup #1, #2, #3 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
0.8 V or 0.75%*
Time Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 0.5%**
* When both RMS and Line-Ground to Line-Line VT connection is selected.
**When RMS (total waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is O20 cycles or 1%.
Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
21
24
27
4
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS (cont.)
Device Setpoint
Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral

Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 14.00 V 0.01 V 0.1 V or 1%
Positive Sequence
Voltage Block 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Forward Under Power Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%
Reverse Under Power Block 1.00 to 0.01 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%
Lead Under var Block 1.00 to 0.01 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%
Lag Under var Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%
Lead Power Factor Block 0.01 to 1.00 0.01 0.03 PU or 3%
Lag Power Factor Block 0.01 to 1.00 0.01 0.03 PU or 3%
High Band Forward
Power Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%
Low Band Forward
Power Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Directional Power
Pickup #1, #2, #3 3.000 to +3.000 PU 0.001 PU 0.002 PU or 2%
Time Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle +16 Cycles or 1%
The minimum Pickup limits are .002 and +.002 respectively.
The per-unit pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal CT secondary current settings. This
function can be selected as either overpower or underpower in the forward direction (positive setting) or reverse
direction (negative setting). Element #3 can be set as real power or reactive power. This function includes a
programmable target LED that may be disabled.
Loss of Field (dual-zone offset-mho characteristic)
Circle Diameter #1, #2 0.1 to 100.0 0.1 0.1 or 5%
(0.5 to 500.0 ) (0.5 or 5%)
Offset #1, #2 50.0 to 50.0 0.1 0.1 or 5%
(250.0 to 250.0 ) (0.5 or 5%)
Time Delay with
Voltage Control #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Voltage Control 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
(positive sequence)
Directional Element 0 to 20 1
Time delay with voltage control for each zone can be individually enabled.

40
32
27
TN
5
Device Setpoint
Negative Sequence Overcurrent

Definite Time
Pickup 3 to 100% 1% 0.5% of 5 A
(0.5% of 1 A)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Inverse Time
Pickup 3 to 100% 1% 0.5 % of 5 A
(0.5% of 1 A)
Time Dial Setting 1 to 95 1 3 Cycles or 3%
(K= I
2
2
t)
Definite Maximum
Time to Trip 600 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Definite Minimum Time 12 Cycles fixed
Reset Time (Linear) 1 to 600 Seconds 1 Second
(from threshold of trip)
Pickup is based on the generator nominal current setting.
Stator Overload Protection
Time Constant #1, #2 1.0 to 999.9 minutes 0.1 minutes
Maximum Overload Current 1.00 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%
(0.20 to 2.00 A)
Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent
Pickup #1, #2 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.1 to 48.0 A) (0.02 A or 3%)
When frequency f is < (f
nom
5 ) Hz add an additional time of (1.5/f + 0.033) sec to the time delay accuracy.
Breaker Failure
Pickup
Phase Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%
(0.02 to 2.00 A) (0.02 A or 2%)
Neutral Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%
(0.02 to 2.00 A) (0.02 A or 2%)
50BF can be initiated from designated M-3425A output contacts or programmable control/status inputs.
Definite Time Overcurrent
Pickup Phase A #1, #2 0.20 A to 240.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.04 A to 48.00 A) (0.02 A or 3%)
Pickup Phase B #1, #2 (same as above)
Pickup Phase C #1, #2 (same as above)
This function uses generator line-side currents.
When 50DT function is used for split-phase differential protection, 50BF, 87, and 87GD functions should not be
used, and the I
A
, I
B
and I
C
inputs must be connected to the split phase differential currents.

50
DT
50
50
BF
50
BF-Ph
50
BF-N
46
49
6
Device Setpoint
Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent

Pickup 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.1 to 48.0 A) (0.02 A or 3%)
When the frequency f is < (f
nom
5) Hz add an additional time of (1.5/f + 0.033) sec to the time delay accuracy.
Inadvertent Energizing
Overcurrent
Pickup 0.5 to 15.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%
(0.1 to 3.00 A) (0.02 A or 2%)
Undervoltage
Pickup 5 to 130 V 1 V 0.5 V
Pick-up Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Drop-out Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent
Pickup 0.25 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 1%
(0.05 to 2.40 A) (0.02 A or 1%)
Characteristic Curve Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves
Moderately Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEEE Curves
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 3%*
0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01
0.85 to 1.15 (IEEE curves) 0.01
* For IEC Curves the timing accuracy is 5%.
When the frequency f is < (f
nom
5 )Hz add an additional time of (1.5/f + 0.033) sec to the time delay accuracy.
Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint
Pickup 0.50 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 1%
(0.10 to 2.40 A) (0.02 A or 1%)
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 3%*
0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01
0.85 to 1.15 (IEEE curves) 0.01
Voltage Control (VC) 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
or
Voltage Restraint (VR) Linear Restraint
* For IEC Curves the timing accuracy is 5%.
51V
51N
50N
50/
27
50
27

7
Device Setpoint
Phase Overvoltage
Pickup #1, #2, #3 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
0.8 V or 0.75%*
Time Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%**
Input Voltage Select Phase, Positive or Negative Sequence***
* When both RMS and Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected.
** When RMS (total waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is +20 cycles or 1%.
*** When positive or negative sequence voltage is selected, the 59 Function uses the discrete Fourier transform
(DFT) for magnitude calculation, irrespective of the RMS/DFT selection, and timing accuracy is 1 Cycle or 1%.
Positive and negative sequence voltages are calculated in terms of line-to-line voltage when Line to Line is
selected for V.T. Configuration.
Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential Ratio
Ratio (V
x
/V
N
) 0.1 to 5.0 0.1
Positive Seq Voltage Block 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Line Side Voltage V
X
or 3V
0
(calculated)
The 59D function with V
X
cannot be enabled if the 25 function is enabled. The line side voltage can be selected
as the third harmonic of 3V
0
(equivalent to V
A
+ V
B
+ V
C
) or V
X
.
3V
0
selection for line side voltage can only be used with line-ground VT configuration.
Neutral Overvoltage
Pickup #1, #2, #3 5.0 to 180.0 V 0.1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Time Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
When 64S is purchased, the 59N Time Delay Accuracy is 1 to +5 cycles.
Multi-purpose Overvoltage
Pickup #1, #2 5.0 to 180.0 V 0.1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Multi-purpose input that may be used for turn-to-turn stator ground protection, bus ground protection, or as an
extra Phase-Phase, or Phase-Ground voltage input.
VT Fuse-Loss Detection
A VT fuse-loss condition is detected by using the positive and negative sequence components
of the voltages and currents. VT fuse-loss output can be initiated from internally generated
logic, and/or from input contacts.
Alarm Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Three Phase VT
Fuse Loss Detection Enable/Disable
59
59N
60
FL
59X
59D

8
Device Setpoint
Residual Directional Overcurrent

Definite Time*
Pickup 0.5 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.1 to 48.0 A) (0.02 A or 3%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Inverse Time*
Pickup 0.25 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%
(0.05 to 2.40 A) (0.02 A or 3%)
Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 5%
0.05 to 1.10 (IEC Curves) 0.01
0.5 to 11 (IEEE curves) 0.01
Directional Element
Max Sensitivity Angle (MSA) 0 to 359 1
Polarizing Quantity 3V
o
(calculated), V
N
or V
X
*Directional control for 67NDT or 67NIT may be disabled.
V
X
polarization cannot be used if 25 function is enabled.
3V
o
polarization can only be used with line-ground VT configuration.
Operating current for 67N can be selected as 3I
o
(calculated) or I
N
(Residual CT).
If 87GD is enabled, 67N with I
N
(Residual CT) operating current will not be available.
Out of Step (mho characteristic)
Circle Diameter 0.1 to 100.0 0.1 0.1 or 5%
(0.5 to 500.0 ) (0.5 or 5%)
Offset 100.0 to 100.0 0.1 0.1 or 5%
(500.0 to 500.0 ) (0.5 or 5%)
Impedance Angle 0 to 90 1 1
Blinder 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 0.1 or 5%
(0.5 to 250.0 ) (0.5 or 5%)
Trip on mho Exit Enable/Disable
Pole Slip Counter 1 to 20 1
Pole Slip Reset 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Frequency
Pickup #1,#2,#3,#4 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.02 Hz
40.00 to 57.00 Hz*
Time Delay #1#4 3 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle 2 Cycles or 1%
The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to
53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz.
* This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency models.

81
78
67N
9
Device Setpoint
Frequency Accumulation
Bands #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6
High Band #1 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.02 Hz
40.00 to 57.00 Hz*
Low Band #1#6 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.02 Hz
40.00 to 57.00 Hz*
Delay #1#6 3 to 360,000 Cycles 1 Cycle 2 Cycles or 1%
When using multiple frequency bands, the lower limit of the previous band becomes the upper limit for the next band,
i.e., Low Band #2 is the upper limit for Band #3, and so forth. Frequency bands must be used in sequential order, 1 to
6. Band #1 must be enabled to use Bands #2#6. If any band is disabled, all following bands are disabled.
When frequency is within an enabled band limit, accumulation time starts (there is an internal ten cycle delay prior to
accumulation) and allows the underfrequency blade resonance to be established to avoid unnecessary accumulation
of time. When duration is greater than set delay, the alarm asserts and a target log entry is made.
The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53 Hz.
Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz.
* This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency models.
Rate of Change of Frequency
Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/Sec. 0.01 Hz/Sec. 0.05 Hz/Sec. or 5%
Time Delay #1, #2 3 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle + 20 Cycles
Negative Sequence
Voltage Inhibit 0 to 99% 1% 0.5%
Phase Differential Current
Pickup #1, #2 0.20 A to 3.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 5%
(0.04 to 0.60 A) (0.02 A or 5%)
Percent Slope #1, #2 1 to 100% 1% 2%
Time Delay* #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
CT Correction** 0.50 to 2.00 0.01 +1 to -2 Cycles or 1%
*When a time delay of 1 cycle is selected, the response time is less than 11/2 cycles.
**The CT Correction factor is multiplied by I
A
,I
B
,I
C.
Ground (zero sequence) Differential Current
Pickup 0.20 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 5%
(0.04 to 2.00 A) (0.02 A or 5%)
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles* 1 Cycle +1 to -2 Cycles or 1%
CT Ratio Correction (R
C
) 0.10 to 7.99 0.01
*The Time Delay Setting should not be less than 2 Cycles.
The 87GD function is provided primarily for low-impedance grounded generator applications. This function
operates as a directional differential. If 3I
0
or I
n
is extremely small (less than 0.2 secondary Amps), the element
becomes non-directional.
If 67N function with I
N
(Residual) operating current is enabled, 87GD will not be available. Also, if 50DT is used
for split-phase differential, 87GD function will not be available.

87
87
GD
81R
81A
10
Device Setpoint
IPSlogic
TM
IPSlogic uses element pickups, element trip commands, control/status input state changes,
output contact close signals to develop 6 programmable logic schemes.
Time Delay #1#6 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Breaker Monitoring
Pickup 0 to 50,000 kA Cycles 1 kA Cycles 1 kACycles
or kA
2
Cycles or kA
2
Cycles or kA
2
Cycles
Time Delay 0.1 to 4095.9 Cycles 0.1 Cycles 1 Cycle or 1%
Timing Method IT or I
2
T
Preset Accumulators 0 to 50,000 kA Cycles 1 kA Cycle
Phase A, B, C
The Breaker Monitor feature calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and
integrating the current (or current squared) through the breaker contacts as an arc.
The per-phase values are added to an accumulated total for each phase, and then compared to a user-programmed
threshhold value. When the threshhold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set a programmable output contact.
The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed.
The Breaker Monitoring feature requires an initiating contact to begin accumulation, and the accumulation begins
after the set time delay.
The AUX input is provided for monitoring the integrity of the trip circuit. This input can be used for nominal trip
coil voltages of 24 V dc, 48 V dc, 125 V dc and 250 V dc.
Nominal Settings
Nominal Voltage 50.0 to 140.0 V 0.1 V
Nominal Current 0.50 to 6.00 A 0.01 A
VT Configuration Line-Line/Line-Ground/
Line-Ground to Line-Line*
Delta/Wye Unit
Transformer Disable/Delta AB/Delta AC
Seal-In Delay 2 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
*When Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected, the relay internally calculates the line-line voltages from the line-ground
voltages for all voltage-sensitive functions. This Line-Ground to Line-Line selection should only be used for a VT
connected Line-Ground with a secondary voltage of 69 V (not 120 V).

IPS
BM
TC
11
64F
64B
25
25S
25D
64S
OPTIONAL PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Device Setpoint
Sync Check
Dead Check
Dead Voltage Limit 0 to 60 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Dead Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Sync Check
Phase Angle Window 0 to 90 1 1
Upper Voltage Limit 60 to 140 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Lower Voltage Limit 40 to 120 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Delta Voltage Limit 1.0 to 50.0 V 0.1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%
Delta Frequency Limit 0.001 to 0.500 Hz 0.001 Hz 0.0007 Hz or 5%
Sync Check Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 to +3 Cycles or 1%
Various combinations of input supervised hot/dead closing schemes may be selected. The 25 function cannot be
enabled if the 59D function with V
X
or 67N function with V
X
is enabled.
Field Ground Protection
Pickup #1, #2 5 to 100 K 1 K 10% or 1K
Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle (
2
IF
+1) Sec.
Injection Frequency (IF) 0.10 to 1.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
Brush Lift-Off Detection (measuring control circuit)
Pickup 0 to 5000 mV 1 mV
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle (
2
IF
+1) Sec.
When 64F is purchased, an external Coupler Module (M-3921) is provided for isolation from dc field voltages.
Figure 10, Field Ground Protection Block Diagram, illustrates a typical connection utilizing the M-3921 Field
Ground Coupler. Hardware dimensional and mounting information is shown in Figure 11, M-3921 Field Ground
Coupler Mounting Dimensions.
100% Stator Ground Protection by low frequency injection
Total Current Pickup 2 to 75 mA 0.1 mA 2 mA or 10%
Real Component of
Total Current Pickup 2 to 75 mA 0.1 mA 2 mA or 10%
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle* or 1%
An external Low Frequency Generator, Band Pass Filter and Current Transformer are required for this function.
Figure 12, 64S Function Component Connection Diagram, illustrates a typical 100% Stator Ground Protection by
Low Frequency Injection application. Hardware dimensional and mounting information is illustrated in Figures
13, 14 and 15.
59D and 27TN function should be disabled when the 64S function is enabled. 59N may be applied when this
function is enabled.
* Time Delay accuracy in cycles is based on 20 Hz frequency.

12
Description
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is suitable for all generator ratings and prime movers. Typical
connection diagrams are illustrated in Figure 4, M-3425A One-Line Functional Diagram (configured for phase
differential), and Figure 5, One-Line Functional Diagram (configured for split-phase differential).
Configuration Options
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is available in either a Base or Comprehensive package of
protective functions. This provides the user with flexibility in selecting a protective system to best suit the
application. Additional Optional Protective Functions may be added at the time of purchase at per-function
pricing.
The Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module, Target Module, or redundant power supply can be selected at
time of purchase.
When the Field Ground (64F) Premium Protective Function is purchased, an external coupler module
(M-3921) is provided for isolation from the dc field voltages.
When 100% Stator Ground (64S) protection using low-frequency injection is purchased, an external band
pass filter and frequency generator is provided.
Multiple Setpoint Profiles (Groups)
The relay supports four setpoint profiles. This feature allows multiple setpoint profiles to be defined for different
power system configurations or generator operating modes. Profiles can be switched either manually using
the Human-Machine Interface (HMI), by communications, programmable logic or by control/status inputs.
NOTE: During profile switching, relay operation is disabled for approximately 1 second.
Metering
The relay provides metering of voltages (phase, neutral and sequence quantities), currents (phase, neutral
and sequence quantities), real power, reactive power, power factor and impedance measurements.
Metering accuracies are:
Voltage: 0.5 V or 0.5%, whichever is greater
0.8 V or 0.75%, whichever is greater (when both RMS and Line-Ground to Line-Line are
selected)
Current: 5 A rating, 0.1 A or 3%, whichever is greater
1 A rating, 0.02 A or 3%, whichever is greater
Power: 0.01 PU or 2% of VA applied, whichever is greater
Frequency: 0.02 Hz (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; from 47 to 53 Hz for 50 Hz models)
0.1 Hz beyond 63 Hz for 60 Hz models, and beyond 53 Hz for 50 Hz models
Volts/Hz: 1%
Oscillographic Recorder
The oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored waveforms, storing up to
416 cycles of data. The total record length is user-configurable from 1 to 16 partitions. The sampling rate is 16
times the power system nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The recorder may be triggered using either the
designated control/status inputs, trip outputs, or using serial communications. When untriggered, the recorder
continuously stores waveform data, thereby keeping the most recent data in memory. When triggered, the
recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues to store data in memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay
period. The data records can be stored in either Beckwith Electric format or COMTRADE format.
Target Storage
Information associated with the last 32 trips is stored. The information includes the function(s) operated, the
functions picked up, input/output status, time stamp, and phase and neutral currents at the time of trip.
13
Sequence of Events Log
The Sequence of Events Log records relay element status, I/O status, measured values and calculated values
time stamped with 1 ms resolution at user-defined events. The Sequence of Events Log includes 512 of the
most recently recorded relay events. The events and the associated data is available for viewing utilizing the
M-3820D IPScom Communications Software.
Calculations
Current and Voltage RMS Values: Uses Discrete Fourier Transform algorithm on sampled voltage and current
signals to extract fundamental frequency phasors for relay calculations. RMS calculation for the 50, 51N, 59
and 27 functions, and the 24 function are obtained using the time domain approach to obtain accuracy over a
wide frequency band. When the RMS option is selected, the magnitude calculation for 59 and 27 functions is
accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz). When the DFT option is selected, the magnitude
calculation is accurate near nominal frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz) but will degrade outside the nominal frequency.
For 50 and 51N functions the DFT is used when the frequency is 55 Hz to 65 Hz for 60 Hz (nominal) and 45 Hz
to 55Hz for 50 Hz (nominal), outside of this range RMS calculation is used.
Power Input Options
Nominal 110/120/230/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz, or nominal 110/125/220/250 V dc. Operates properly from 85 V ac
to 265 V ac and from 80 V dc to 312.5 V dc. Withstands 300 V ac or 315 V dc for 1 second. Nominal burden 40
VA at 120 V ac/125 V dc.
Nominal 24/48 V dc, operates properly from 18 V dc to 56 V dc, withstands 65 V dc for 1 second. Burden 25 VA
at 24 V dc and 30 VA at 48 V dc.
An optional redundant power supply is available for units that are purchased without the expanded I/O.
For those units purchased with the expanded I/O, the unit includes two power supplies which are required to
power the relay. Burden (nominal) 46 VA @120 V ac.
Sensing Inputs
Five Voltage Inputs: Rated for a nominal voltage of 50 V ac to 140 V ac at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand 240 V
continuous voltage and 360 V for 10 seconds. Source voltages may be line-to-ground or line-to-line connected.
Phase sequence ABC or ACB is software selectable. Voltage transformer burden less than 0.2 VA at 120 V ac.
Seven Current Inputs: Rated nominal current (I
R
) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand 3I
R
continuous current and 100I
R
for 1 second. Current transformer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A, or 0.3 VA
at 1 A.
Control/Status Inputs
The control/status inputs, INPUT1 through INPUT6, can be programmed to block any relay protective function,
to trigger the oscillograph recorder, to operate one or more outputs or can be an input into IPSlogic. To provide
breaker status LED indication on the front panel, the INPUT1 control/status input contact must be connected to
the 52b breaker status contact.
The optional expanded I/O includes an additional 8 programmable control/status inputs (INPUT7 through
INPUT14).
CAUTION: The control/status inputs should be connected to dry contacts only, and are internally connected
(wetted) with a 24 V dc power supply.
Output Contacts
Any of the functions can be individually programmed to activate any one or more of the eight programmable
output contacts OUTPUT1 through OUTPUT8. Any output contact can also be selected as pulsed or latched.
IPSlogic can also be used to activate an output contact.
The optional expanded I/O includes an additional 15 programmable output contacts (OUTPUT9 through
OUTPUT23). These contacts are configurable only using IPScom software.
The eight output contacts (six form a and two form c), the power supply alarm output contact (form b), the self-
test alarm output contact (form c) and the optional 15 expanded I/O output contacts (form 'a') are all rated per
ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1989 for tripping. Make 30 A for 0.2 seconds, carry 8 A, break 6 A at 120 V ac, break 0.5 A at
48 V dc; 0.3 A, 125 V dc; 0.2 A, 250 V dc with L/R=40 mSec.
14
IPSlogic
This feature can be programmed utilizing the IPScom
Communications Software. IPSlogic takes the contact

input status and function status, and by employing (OR, AND, and NOT) boolean logic and a timer, can
activate an output or change setting profiles.
Target/Status Indicators and Controls
The RELAY OK LED reveals proper cycling of the microcomputer. The BRKR CLOSED LED will illuminate
when the breaker is closed (when the 52b contact input is open). The OSC TRIG LED indicates that
oscillographic data has been recorded in the unit's memory. The TARGET LED will illuminate when any of the
relay functions operate. Pressing and releasing the TARGET RESET buttonresets the target LED if the
conditions causing the operation have been removed. Holding the TARGET RESET push button displays the
present pickup status of the relay functions. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs will remain illuminated as long as power
is applied to the unit and the power supply is operating properly. TIME SYNC LED illuminates when valid
IRIG-B signal is applied and time synchronization has been established.
Communication
Communications ports include rear panel RS-232 and RS-485 ports, a front panel RS-232 port, a rear-panel
IRIG-B port and an Ethernet port (optional). The communications protocol implements serial, byte-oriented,
asynchronous communication, providing the following functions when used with the Windows
-compatible
M-3820D IPScom
Communications Software. MODBUS and BECO 2200 protocols are supported providing:
Interrogation and modification of setpoints
Time-stamped information for the 32 most recent trips
Real-time metering of all quantities measured
Downloading of recorded oscillographic data and Sequence of Events Recorder data.
The optional Ethernet port can be purchased with MODBUS over TCP/IP and BECO2200 over TCP/IP
protocols or with the IEC 61850 protocol.
IRIG-B
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay can accept either modulated or demodulated IRIG-B time clock
synchronization signal. The IRIG-B time synchronization information is used to correct the hour, minutes,
seconds, and milliseconds information.
HMI Module (optional)
Local access to the relay is provided through an optional M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Module,
allowing for easy-to-use, menu-driven access to all functions utilizing six pushbuttons and a 2-line by 24
character alphanumeric vacuum florescent display. Features of the HMI Module include :
User-definable access codes that allow three levels of security
Time-stamped information for the 32 most recent trips
Real-time metering of all quantities measured
Target Module (optional)
An optional M-3925A Target Module provides 24 target and 8 output LEDs. Appropriate target LEDs will
illuminate when the corresponding function operates. The targets can be reset with the TARGET RESET
pushbutton. The OUTPUT LEDs indicate the status of the programmable output relays.
15
Temperature Controller Monitoring
Any Temperature Controller equipped with a contact output may be connected to the M-3425A and controlled
by the relay's programmable IPSlogic function. Figure 1 is an example of a typical Temperature Controller
Monitoring application. The Omron E5C2 Temperature Controller is a DIN rail mounted RTD interface to the
M-3425A Generator Protection relay. The E5C2 accepts type J or K thermocouples, platinum RTDs or
thermistors as its input. Supply voltage for the E5C2 accepts 110/120 V ac, 50/60 Hz, or 220/240 V ac 50/60
Hz or 24 V dc.
Temperature
Controller
Omron E5C2
P.D. 750
or equivalent
IN X
IN RTN
M-3425A
IPSlogic
Alarm/Trip
R1
C
R2
Figure 1 Typical Temperature Controller Monitoring Application
I/O Expansion (optional)
Optional I/O Expansion provides an additional 15 form 'a' output contacts and an additional 8 control/status
inputs. Output LEDs indicate the status of the output relays.
Tests and Standards
The relay complies with the following type tests and standards:
Voltage Withstand
Dielectric Withstand
IEC 60255-5 3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to each independent circuit to earth
3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between each independent circuit
1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to IRIG-B circuit to earth
1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between IRIG-B to each independent circuit
1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between RS-485 to each independent circuit
Impulse Voltage
IEC 60255-5 5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied between each independent circuit
1.2 by 50 s, 500 ohms impedance, three surges at 1 every 5 seconds
Insulation Resistance
IEC 60255-5 > 100 Megaohms
16
Electrical Environment
Electrostatic Discharge Test
EN 60255-22-2 Class 4 (8 kV)point contact discharge
EN 60255-22-2 Class 4 (15kV)air discharge
Fast Transient Disturbance Test
EN 60255-22-4 Class A (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)
Surge Withstand Capability
ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth
C37.90.1- 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit
1989 5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit
C37.90.1- 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit
2002 4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied to each independent circuit to earth
4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied between each independent circuit
NOTE: The signal is applied to the digital data circuits (RS-232, RS-485, IRIG-B, Ethernet communication
port and field ground coupling port) through capacitive coupling clamp.
Radiated Susceptibility
ANSI/IEEE 25-1000 Mhz @ 35 V/m
C37.90.2
Output Contacts
ANSI/IEEE Make 30 A for 0.2 seconds, off for 15 seconds for 2,000 operations, per Section 6.7.1,
Tripping
C37.90.0 Output Performance Requirements
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 Cold, 20 C
IEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat, +70 C
IEC 60068-2-3 Damp Heat, +40 C @ 93% RH
Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1Vibration response Class 1, 0.5 g
Vibration endurance Class 1, 1.0 g
IEC 60255-21-2Shock Response Class 1, 5.0 g
Shock Withstand Class 1, 15.0 g
Bump Endurance Class 1, 10.0 g
17
Compliance
UL-Listed per 508 Industrial Control Equipment
UL-Listed Component per 508A Table SA1.1 Industrial Control Panels
CSA-Certified per C22.2 No. 14-95 Industrial Control Equipment
CE Safety Directive EN61010-1:2001, CAT II, Pollution Degree 2
Physical
Without Optional Expanded I/O
Size: 19.00" wide x 5.21" high x 10.20" deep (48.3 cm x 13.2 cm x 25.9 cm)
Mounting: The unit is a standard 19", semiflush, three-unit high, rack-mount panel design, conforming to
ANSI/EIA RS-310C and DIN 41494 Part 5 specifications. Vertical or horizontal panel-mount options are
available.
Approximate Weight: 17 lbs (7.7 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 25 lbs (11.3 kg)
With Optional Expanded I/O
Size: 19.00" wide x 6.96" high x 10.2" deep (48.3 cm x 17.7 cm x 25.9 cm)
Mounting: The unit is a standard 19", semiflush, four-unit high, rack-mount panel design, conforming to ANSI/
EIA RS-310C and DIN 41494 Part 5 specifications. Vertical or horizontal panel-mount options are available.
Approximate Weight: 19 lbs (8.6 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 26 lbs (11.8 kg)
Recommended Storage Parameters
Temperature: 5 C to 40 C
Humidity: Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31 C, decreasing to 31 C
linearly to 50% relative humidity at 40 C.
Environment: Storage area to be free of dust, corrosive gases, flammable materials, dew, perco-
lating water, rain and solar radiation.
See M-3425A Instruction Book, Appendix E, Layup and Storage for additional information.
Patent & Warranty
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is covered by U.S. Patents 5,592,393 and 5,224,011.
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is covered by a five year warranty from date of shipment.
Specification subject to change without notice.
External Connections
M-3425A external connection points are illustrated in Figures 2 and 3.
18
F
i
g
u
r
e

2
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s

(
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l

E
x
p
a
n
d
e
d

I
/
O
)

N
O
T
E
S
:
1
.
S
e
e

M
-
3
4
2
5
A

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

B
o
o
k

S
e
c
t
i
o
n

2
.
3
,

S
e
t
p
o
i
n
t
s

a
n
d

T
i
m
e

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
,

s
u
b
s
e
c
t
i
o
n

f
o
r

6
4
B
/
F

F
i
e
l
d

G
r
o
u
n
d

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
.
2
.
B
e
f
o
r
e

m
a
k
i
n
g

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s

t
o

t
h
e

T
r
i
p

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

i
n
p
u
t
,

s
e
e

M
-
3
4
2
5
A

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

B
o
o
k

S
e
c
t
i
o
n

5
.
5
,

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
o
a
r
d

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s

a
n
d
J
u
m
p
e
r
s
,

f
o
r

t
h
e

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

r
e
g
a
r
d
i
n
g

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

T
r
i
p

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

i
n
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
.

C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g

a

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

o
t
h
e
r

t
h
a
n

t
h
e

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

u
n
i
t

i
s
c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
e
d

t
o

m
a
y

r
e
s
u
l
t

i
n

m
i
s
-
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

o
r

p
e
r
m
a
n
e
n
t

d
a
m
a
g
e

t
o

t
h
e

u
n
i
t
.
3
.
8888 8
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
:

O
N
L
Y

D
R
Y

C
O
N
T
A
C
T
S

m
u
s
t

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

t
o

i
n
p
u
t
s

(
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s

5

t
h
r
o
u
g
h

1
0

w
i
t
h

1
1

c
o
m
m
o
n
)

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

t
h
e
s
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
i
n
p
u
t
s

a
r
e

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
l
y

w
e
t
t
e
d
.

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

o
n

t
h
e
s
e

i
n
p
u
t
s

m
a
y

r
e
s
u
l
t

i
n

d
a
m
a
g
e

t
o

t
h
e

u
n
i
t
s
.
4
.
8888 8

W
A
R
N
I
N
G
:

T
h
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

m
u
s
t

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

t
o

a
n

e
a
r
t
h
e
d

g
r
o
u
n
d

a
n
y

t
i
m
e

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s

h
a
v
e

b
e
e
n
m
a
d
e

t
o

t
h
e

u
n
i
t
.
3
A
M
P
,
2
5
0
V
(
3
A
B
)
3
A
M
P
,
2
5
0
V
(
3
A
B
)
R
A
T
E
D
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
1
A
,
N
O
M
5
A
,
N
O
M
0
.
0
1
A
N
O
M
6
4
S
F
4
I
N
A
U
X
C
O
M
3
R
S
4
8
5
5I
N
6
I
N
4
L
A
R
G
O
,
F
L
3
3
7
7
3
6
1
9
0
1
1
8
t
h
A
V
E
N
O
.
B
E
C
K
W
I
T
H
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
C
O
.
I
N
C
.
7
2
7
-
5
4
4
-
2
3
2
6
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
5
0
H
z
6
0
H
z
S
E
R
I
A
L
N
O
.
A
L
A
R
M
S
F
O
R
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
R
A
T
I
N
G
S
S
E
E
I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
M
A
N
U
A
L
S
E
L
F
-
T
E
S
T
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
!
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
W
I
T
H
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
S
M
A
Y
C
A
U
S
E
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
S
H
O
C
K
(
5
2
b
)
I
N
P
U
T
S
3I
N
2I
N
1
I
N
P
/
S
R
T
N
I
N
P
S
2
F
2
P
S
1
C
O
M
2
E
T
H
E
R
N
E
T
4
1
2
3
-3
G
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
L
D
F
I
E
1
2
-
+
B
A
V
N
D
V
A
C
V
B
V
B
4
5
6
+
7
9
8
C
V
A
V
C
N
V
1
0
1
1
1
3
1
2
A
I
B
I
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
6
3
6
3
6
3
6
3
9
3
9
3
9
3
9
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
8
3
8
3
8
3
8
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
5
4
5
6
4
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
V
6
5
4
6
4
7
4
9
4
8
5
0
2
6
1
5
1
4
1
6
1
8
1
7
1
9
N
C
I
I
a
I
8
2
3
2
1
2
0
2
2
2
4
2
5
b
7
I
I
c
6
5
2
P
S
2
7
2
9
2
8
3
1
3
0
3
2
S
4
P
1
3
2
3
4
3
3
1
5
3
5
1
5
2
5
4
5
5
5
7
5
6
5
8
6
0
5
9
6
1
6
2
6
3
I
R
I
G
-
B
R
S
2
3
2
C
O
M
2
F
1
F
3
6
4
F
!
!
4
8
2
4
2
5
0
1
2
5
!
M
O
D
E
L
:

M
-
3
4
2
5
A

F
I
R
M
W
A
R
E
:

D
-
0
1
5
0
-
+
+
-
5
5
2
6
8
6
5
-
1
8
6 6
8
5
2
1
-
8
5
5
R
A
T
E
D
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
6
0
-
1
4
0
V
A
C
,
5
0
/
6
0
H
z
L
IS
T
E
D
8
3
F
4
IN
D
.C
O
N
T
.E
Q
R
L
R
8
9
4
6
4
N
R
T
L
/
CR
19
I
N
R
T
N
I
N
I
N
I
N
I
N
I
N
I
N
I
N
I
N
8
7
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
3
I
N
P
U
T
S
R
S
2
3
2
C
O
M
2
E
T
H
E
R
N
E
T
C
O
M
2
7
2
7
-
5
4
4
-
2
3
2
6
6
1
9
0
1
1
8
t
h
A
V
E
N
O
.
L
A
R
G
O
,
F
L
3
3
7
7
3
B
E
C
K
W
I
T
H
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
C
O
.
I
N
C
.
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
!
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
W
I
T
H
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
S
M
A
Y
C
A
U
S
E
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
S
H
O
C
K
F
O
R
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
R
A
T
I
N
G
S
S
E
E
I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
M
A
N
U
A
L
7
6
7
8
7
7
8
0
7
9
8
1
8
3
8
2
8
4
8
8
8
6
8
5
8
7
8
9
9
1
9
0
9
2
9
4
9
3
9
6
9
5
9
7
9
9
9
8
4
3
1
2
.
Q
E
.
T
N
O
C
.
D
NI
D
E
T
SI
L
C
U
S
8
3
F
4
R
P
/
S
3
6
3
6
3
6
3
6
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
3
8
3
8
3
8
3
8
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
9
3
9
3
9
3
9
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
6
4
V
X
6
5
4
5
4
5
4
6
4
7
4
8
4
9
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
D
E
I
F
L
I
R
I
G
-
B
2
3
A
U
X
N
G
D
A
V
V
A
B
B
V
B
V
C
C
V
A
V
C
R
S
4
8
5
C
O
M
3
+
-
-
6
+
I
N
3
1
2
5
4
(
5
2
b
)
V
N
3 I
N
I
N
P
U
T
S
4
5 I
N
I
N
1
2
I
N
I
N
A
I
I
B
R
T
N
I
N
8
7
6
1
0
9
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
0
1
9
3
A
M
P
,
2
5
0
V
(
3
A
B
)
3
A
M
P
,
2
5
0
V
(
3
A
B
)
5
8
5
4
5
2
5
0
5
1
5
3
5
6
5
5
5
7
6
2
6
0
5
9
6
1
6
3
F
3
F
4
3
2
P
S
2
1
0
C
I
I
N
S
E
L
F
-
T
E
S
T
A
L
A
R
M
S
a
I
I
b
8
7
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
1
5
1
3
1
4
1
7
1
6
1
8
1
7
2
0
1
9
1
8
2
2
2
1
1
6
1
5
c
I
S
P
2
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
6
5
1
S
P
F
1
3
4
2
2
7
2
4
2
3
2
5
2
6
1
4
1
3
2
9
2
8
3
1
3
0
1
2
1
1
P
S
1
F
2
1
3
4
3
3
9
6
8
6
6
6
7
6
9
7
0
7
1
7
2
7
4
7
3
7
5
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
2
1
0
4
1
0
3
1
0
5
!
4
8
!
1
2
5
2
5
0
2
4
!
0
.
0
1
A
N
O
M
6
4
S
8
8 1
6
-
2
5
5
8
5
6
8 1
5
2
6
-
5
5
6
+
+
-
-
R
A
T
E
D
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
6
0
-
1
4
0
V
A
C
,
5
0
/
6
0
H
z
M
O
D
E
L
:

M
-
3
4
2
5
A

F
I
R
M
W
A
R
E
:

D
-
0
1
5
0
5
0
H
z
6
0
H
z
S
E
R
I
A
L
N
O
.
1
A
,
N
O
M
R
A
T
E
D
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
5
A
,
N
O
M
6
4
F
F
i
g
u
r
e

3
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s

(
W
i
t
h

O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l

E
x
p
a
n
e
d

I
/
O
)

N
O
T
E
S
:
1
.
S
e
e

M
-
3
4
2
5
A

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

B
o
o
k

S
e
c
t
i
o
n

2
.
3
,

S
e
t
p
o
i
n
t
s

a
n
d

T
i
m
e

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
,

s
u
b
s
e
c
t
i
o
n

f
o
r

6
4
B
/
F

F
i
e
l
d

G
r
o
u
n
d

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
.
2
.
B
e
f
o
r
e

m
a
k
i
n
g

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s

t
o

t
h
e

T
r
i
p

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

i
n
p
u
t
,

s
e
e

M
-
3
4
2
5
A

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

B
o
o
k

S
e
c
t
i
o
n

5
.
5
,

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
o
a
r
d

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s

a
n
d
J
u
m
p
e
r
s
,

f
o
r

t
h
e

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

r
e
g
a
r
d
i
n
g

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

T
r
i
p

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

i
n
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
.

C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g

a

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

o
t
h
e
r

t
h
a
n

t
h
e

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

u
n
i
t

i
s
c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
e
d

t
o

m
a
y

r
e
s
u
l
t

i
n

m
i
s
-
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

o
r

p
e
r
m
a
n
e
n
t

d
a
m
a
g
e

t
o

t
h
e

u
n
i
t
.
3
.
88 888
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
:

O
N
L
Y

D
R
Y

C
O
N
T
A
C
T
S

m
u
s
t

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

t
o

i
n
p
u
t
s

(
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s

5

t
h
r
o
u
g
h

1
0

w
i
t
h

1
1

c
o
m
m
o
n

a
n
d

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s

6
8
t
h
r
o
u
g
h

7
5

w
i
t
h

6
6

a
n
d

6
7

c
o
m
m
o
n
)

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

t
h
e
s
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t

i
n
p
u
t
s

a
r
e

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
l
y

w
e
t
t
e
d
.

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

o
n

t
h
e
s
e
i
n
p
u
t
s

m
a
y

r
e
s
u
l
t

i
n

d
a
m
a
g
e

t
o

t
h
e

u
n
i
t
s
.
4
.
88 888

W
A
R
N
I
N
G
:

T
h
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
n
d
i
n
g

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

m
u
s
t

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

t
o

a
n

e
a
r
t
h
e
d

g
r
o
u
n
d

a
n
y

t
i
m
e

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s

h
a
v
e

b
e
e
n
m
a
d
e

t
o

t
h
e

u
n
i
t
.
20
50
DT
Utility System
52
Unit
52
Gen
50
BFPh
87
49 21 32 50 40 78
60
FL
51V 50/27
27
81R 81 27 59 24
64F 64B
M-3921
+
-
CT
VT
M-3425A
87
GD
50N
50
BFN
51N
R
64S
27
TN
27
32
R
High-impedance Grounding with Third
Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection
Low-impedance Grounding with Ground Differential
and Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection
These functions are available in
the Comprehensive Package. A
subset of these functions are also
available in a Base Package.
This function is available as a
optional protective function.
This function provides control for
the function to which it points.
M-3425A Typical
Connection Diagram
25
59D
VT (Note 1)
Targets
(Optional)
Integral HMI
(Optional)
Metering
Waveform Capture
IRIG-B
Front RS232
Communication
Multiple Setting
Groups
Programmable I/O
Self Diagnostics
Dual Power Supply
(Optional)
Rear Ethernet
Port (Optional)
Rear RS-485
Communication
Breaker
Monitoring
Trip Circuit
Monitoring
67N
67N Polarization
(Software Select)
81A
50N
50
BFN
51N
46
59X
59N
3V
O
(Calculated)
V
X
V
N
3I
O
I
N
67N Operating Current
(Software Select)
VT (Note 1)
(Note 3)
(Note 5)
CT (Residual)
(Note 4)
59D Line Side
Voltage
(Software Select)
V
X
3V
O
(Calculated)
CT (Neutral)
(Notes 2 & 5)
CT
M
(Metering)
M
(Metering)
Rear RS232
Communication
Event Log
NOTES:
1. When 25 function is enabled, 59X, 59D with V
X
and 67N with V
X
are not available, and vice versa.
2. When 67N function with I
N
(Residual) operating current is enabled, 87GD is not available, and vice
versa.
3. When VT source is used as a turn-to-turn fault protection device (See M-3425A Instruction Book,
Chapter 2, Application, for additional 59X applications.)
4. The current input I
N
can be connected either from neutral current or residual current.
5. The 50BFN, 50N, 51N, 59D, 67N (with I
N
or V
N
) and 87GD functions are unavailable when the 64S
function has been purchased. See the M-3425A Instruction Book for connection details.
Figure 4 One-Line Functional Diagram (Configured with Phase Differential)
21
Utility System
52
Unit
52
Gen
81R 81 59 27 24
M-3921
+
-
VT
CT
M-3425A
50N 51N
R
CT
27
32
R
Low-impedance Grounding with
Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection
M-3425A Typical
Connection Diagram
(Configured for Split-Phase Differential)
25
59D
50
DT
67N
Targets
(Optional)
Integral HMI
(Optional)
Metering
Waveform Capture
IRIG-B
Front RS232
Communication
Multiple Setting
Groups
Programmable I/O
Self Diagnostics
Dual Power Supply
(Optional)
Rear Ethernet
Port (Optional)
Rear RS-485
Communication
Breaker
Monitoring
Trip Circuit
Monitoring
27
TN
81A
46 49 21 32 50 40 78 60FL 51V 50/27
27
64F 64B
59X
64S 59N
CT (Residual)
(Note 5)
VT (Note 1)
VT (Note 1)
67N Polarization
(Software Select)
3V
O
(Calculated)
V
X
V
N
(Note 2)
CT (Note 3)
(Note 4)
59D Line Side
Voltage
(Software Select)
V
X
3V
O
(Calculated)
CT (Neutral)
(Note 5)
M
(Metering)
M
(Metering)
Rear RS232
Communication
Event Log
NOTES:
X
and 67N with V
X
2. When used as a turn-turn fault protection device.
3. CTs are connected for split-phase differential current.
4. 67N operating current can only be selected to I
N
(Residual) for this configuration.
5. The current input (I
N
) can be connected either from neutral current or residual current.
N
or V
N
Figure 5 One-Line Functional Diagram (configured for split-phase diffential)
22
17.48 [44.4]
ACTUAL
5.21 [13.23]
ACTUAL
10.20 [25.91]
19.00
[48.26]
18.34 [46.58]
19.00 [48.26]
2.35 [5.96]
1.35 [3.42]
Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis
n NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.
0.33
[0.84]
Rear View
0.40 [1.02] x 0.27 [0.68] SLOT (4x)
Figure 6 Horizontal Mounting Dimensions (Without Expanded I/O)
NOTE: Panels for vertical mounting are available (See Figure 8).
23
Figure 7 Horizontal Mounting Dimensions (With Expanded I/O)
Made in U.S.A.
SYNC
TIME
OK
RELAY
COM 1
PS
1 PS
2
BRKR
CLOSED
OSC.
TRIG
TARGET
R
RESET
TARGET
EXIT ENTER
DIAG
M-3425A
GENERATOR PROTECTION
.25 X .45 SLOT [.64 X 1.14]
4 PLACES
19.00
[48.26]
6.96
[17.68]
4.00
[10.16]
1.48
3.76
0.33
[0.84]
18.34
[46.58]
17.50
[44.5 +.30 -.00]
.00
.12
PANEL CUTOUT
9.97
[25.32]
11 9 10 12 13 14 15 16
OUTPUTS
17 19 18 20 21 22 23
T
R
O INC . . C
IC
H B
E C E L T
K C E WI
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 5
OUT 6
OUTPUTS
OUT 7
OUT 8
TARGET
24
17.31
[43.97]
Actual
17.5
[44.45]
1.67
[4.24]
19.00
[48.26]
18.34
[46.58]
2.25
[5.72]
0.40 [1.02] X
0.27 [0.68]
Slot (4X)
Front View
NOTE: Dimensions in brackets
are in centimeters.
Rear View
RECOMMENDED CUTOUT WHEN RELAY IS
NOT USED AS STANDARD RACK MOUNT
AND IS PANEL CUT OUT MOUNTED
Optional Vertical Mount Chassis
5.59
[14.20]
Actual
5.65
[14.40]
NOTES:
1. When mounted vertically, the target module will be located at the top and all front-panel text will be
horizontally aligned. Consult Beckwith Electric Co. for details.
2. Expanded I/O not avilable on vertical mount chassis model.
Figure 8 Vertical Mounting Dimensions (Without Expanded I/O)
25
18.34
[46.6]
18.34
[46.6]
17.68
[44.91]
.33
[.84]
1.48
[3.76]
17.68
[44.91]
5.28
[13.40]
2.25
[5.72]
4.00
[10.16]
7.03
[17.86]
1.48
[3.76]
.33
[.84]
\U+2205.28 (4X)
\U+2205.28 (4X)
RECOMMENDED CUTOUT
STANDARD 3 UNIT PANEL M-3425A
RECOMMENDED CUTOUT
4 UNIT PANEL M-3425A (EXTENDED I/O)
TOLERANCE: .XX.015
Figure 9 M-3425A Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions
26
M-3921 Field Ground Coupler
PROTECTION RELAY
M-3425A
PROCESSOR
Field Ground
Detection
Squarewave
Generator
Signal
Measurement
and Processing
COUPLING
NETWORK
(M-3921)
Ground/Machine Frame
Shaft
Ground
Brush
Excitation
System
Gen.
Rotor
Brushes
Figure 10 Field Ground Protection Block Diagram
NOTES:
1. The above circuit measures insulation resistance (R
f
) between rotor field winding and ground (64F).
2. Relay injects 15 V squarewave (V
out
) and measures return signal (V
f
) to calculate R
f
.
3. The injection frequency can be set (0.1 to 1.0 Hz) based on the rotor capacitance, in order to
improve accuracy.
4. The signal rise time is analyzed to determine if shaft brushes are lifting or open (64B).
5. May also be applied on generators with brushless excitation with a grounding brush and pilot
ground fault detection brush.
Function Specification
Field/Exciter Supply Voltage Rating (Terminal (3) to (2)):
60 to 1200 V dc, continuous
1500 V dc, 1 minute
Operating Temperature: 20 to +70, Centigrade
Patent & Warranty
The M-3921 Field Ground Coupler is covered by a five-year warranty from date of shipment.
Tests and Standards
M-3921 Field Ground Coupler complies with the following tests and standards:
27
Voltage Withstand
Isolation
4 kV ac for 1 minute, all terminals to case
Impulse Voltage
IEC 602555, 5,000 V pk, 1.2 by 50 s, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at 5 second
intervals per minute
Electrical Interference
Electrostatic Discharge Test
IEC 61000-4-2 Class 4 (8 kV)point contact discharge
Fast Transient Disturbance Tests
IEC 61000-4-4 Class 4 (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)
Surge Withstand Capability
C37.90.1- 2,500 V pk-pk applied between each independent circuit
1989 5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit
NOTE: See also M-3425A Surge Withstand Capability test standards, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2-2002.
Radiated Susceptibility
ANSI/IEEE 25-1000 Mhz @ 20 V/m
C37.90.2
Atmospheric Environment
IEC 6006821 Cold, 20 C
IEC 6006822 Dry Heat, +70 C
IEC 6006823 Damp Heat, +40 C @ 93% RH
Enclosure Protection
NEMA 1, IEC IPC-65
28
.18 DIA [0.46] 4 HOLES
MOUNTING PATTERN
WITHOUT TABS
Field Ground
Coupler
4.72 [11.99]
7.87 [19.99]
2.96 REF [7.52]
3.54 [9.0]
nNOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.
7.40
[18.79]
9.06 [23.01]
3.54 [9.0]
.18 DIA [0.46] 4 X
CO. INC.
ELECT RIC
BECKWITH
Made in U.S.A.
M-3921
Figure 11 M-3921 Field Ground Coupler Mounting Dimensions
29
64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low Frequency Signal Injection
NOTE: The Stator Ground Protection function (64S) must be selected when the M-3425A is initially
ordered.
The 100% stator ground fault protection is provided by injecting an external 20 Hz signal into the neutral of the
generator. The protection is provided when the machine is on-line as well as off-line (provided that the 20 Hz
generator and relay are powered on.) This scheme requires the following external components in addition to
M-3425A protection system:
20 Hz Signal-generator (BECO Part No. 430-00426) (Siemens 7XT33)
Band-pass filter. (BECO Part No. 430-00427) (Siemens 7XT34)
20 Hz Measuri ng Current Transformer, 400/5 A CT (BECO Part No. 430-00428)
(ITI-CTW3-60-T50-401)
The voltage signal generated by the 20 Hz signal-generator is injected into the secondary of the generator
neutral grounding transformer through a band-pass filter. The band-pass filter passes the 20 Hz signal and
rejects out-of-band signals. The output of the 20 Hz band-pass filter is connected to the V
N
input of the
M-3425A relay through a suitable voltage divider, that limits the M-3425A to O OO OO 200 V ac (the voltage generator
may be bypassed if the expected 50/60 Hz voltage during a phase-to-ground fault of the generator is O OO OO 200 V.)
The 20Hz current is also connected to the I
N
input of the M-3425A, through the 20Hz current transformer.
When the generator is operating normally (no ground fault) only a small amount of 20 Hz current will flow as a
result of the stator capacitance to ground. When a ground fault occurs anywhere on the generator stator
windings the 20 Hz current will increase. The 64S function will issue a trip signal after a set time delay when the
measured 20 Hz current exceeds the pickup current.
For cases where the Load Resistor (R
N
) is small, the Undervoltage Inhibit should not be enabled, as the
voltage will be small.
The 59N function (90 to 95%) should also be used in conjunction with 64S protection to provide backup.
R
N
1B1
1A1
1B4
1A3 1A4
20 Hz
Band Pass
Filter
20 Hz
Generator
4A1
1A1
1A2
1A3
2A3
2A1
3A2
3A1 4A3
Bl
3A3
Supply
Voltage
DC AC
+V
Aux
V
A(L1)
-V
Aux
V
B(L2)
V
C(L3)
External
Block
Device
Operative
44 45
M-3425A
52 53
400A
5A
L K
l k
Max. 200 V
V
N
I
N
Neutral
Grounding
Transformer
Wiring
Shielded
20 Hz CT
400/5 A
59N
High *
Voltage
Low
Voltage
* For applications with a transformer secondary rating that will result in 50/60 Hz phase
ground fault voltages >200 V ac, use the "High Voltage" connection for the 59N Function.
Figure 12 64S Function Component Connection Diagram
30
20 Hz Signal Generator Function Specifications
Auxillary Voltage
Rated auxiliary voltage U
H
ac 3x (100/110 V ac), 50/60 Hz 1x (110 to 230 V ac), 50/60 Hz
Permissible variations ac 80 to 130 V ac 80 to 265 V ac
OR
Rated auxiliary voltage U
H
dc 110 to 220 V dc
Permissible Variations dc 88 to 253 V dc
Permissible comsumption at 8 W impendance O OO OO110 VA
20 Hz Output Voltage
Connections (4A1-4A3)
Output Voltage approx. 25 V rectangular; 20 Hz 0.2 Hz
Load Capability, continuous 75 VA
NOTE: If the input voltage is slowly increased, appearance of the output voltage may last up to 1 minute.
Binary Input for Blocking
Permissible voltage, continuous 300 V dc
Alarm Relay
Switching capacity MAKE/BREAK 20W/VA
Switching voltage for O OO OO30 s 250 V dc
Permissible current MAKE 5A
Permissible current BREAK 1A
Test Voltage
2.8 kV dc
Permissible Ambient Temperatures
with R
L
< << <<5 W burden O OO OO40
0
C or O OO OO104
0
F
with R
L
> >> >>5 W burden O OO OO55
0
C or O OO OO131
0
F
NOTE: The device may produce up to 20 W power losses during service. In order to prevent heat pockets,
the dissipation of the losses must not be restricted. The minimum clearance above and below the
device to other units or walls is 100 mm or 4 inches. In cubicles, the device shall be installed in the
bottom area.
31
NOTE: Detailed Mounting information is contained in the M-3425A Instruction Book Chapter 5, Installation
Section 5.6.
Figure 13 20Hz Signal Generator Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
32
Band-pass Filter Specifications
Load Capacity of the 20 Hz Band-pass Filter
Connections (1B1-1B4)
Permissible voltage, continuous 55 V ac
Permissible voltage for O OO OO30 s 550 V ac
Frequency of superimposed ac voltage P PP PP 45 Hz
Overload capability, continuous 3.25 A ac
Test Voltage 2.8 kV dc
Load Capability of the Voltage Divider Circuit
Connections (1A1-1A4):
Permissible voltage, continuous 55 V ac
Permissible voltage for O OO OO30 s 50 V ac
Test Voltage 2.8 kV dc
Permissible Ambient Temperatures
with R
L
< << <<5 burden O OO OO40
0
C or O OO OO 104
0
F
with R
L
> >> >>5 burden O OO OO55
0
C or O OO OO 131
0
F
NOTE: The device may produce up to 75 W power losses during service. In order to prevent heat pockets,
the dissipation of the losses must not be restricted. The minimum clearance above and below the
device to other units or walls is 100 mm or 4 inches. In cubicles, the device shall be installed in the
bottom area.
33
NOTE: Detailed Mounting information is contained in the M-3425A Instruction Book Chapter 5, Installation
Section 5.
Figure 14 Band-pass Filter Dimensions
34
Figure 15 20 Hz Measuring Current Transformer 400-5 A CT
35

800-3425A-SP-06 07/08
2001 Beckwith Electric Co.
Printed in U.S.A. (#01-67) (04.25.03)
WARNNG
DANGEROU8 VOLTAGE8, capable of causing death or serious
in]ury, are present on the external terminals and inside the equip-
ment. Use extreme caution and follow all safety rules when han-
dling, testing or ad]usting the equipment. However, these internal
voltage levels are no greater than the voltages applied to the exter-
nal terminals.
DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE
This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and you
must never touch it.
PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application,
test or repair of this equipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intended
use of the product. Qualified personnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. Beckwith
Electric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation
manual for important information before proceeding.
Always Ground the Equipment
To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servicing
equipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate ground securely
by use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors.
Do NOT operate in an explosive environment
Do not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do so would
risk a possible fire or explosion.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power is ap-
plied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerous volt-
ages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnect power and
discharge circuits before working on the unit.
Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance procedures
The equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury or death.
Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure that all per-
sonnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicing alone.
Do not modify equipment
Do not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a Beckwith
Electric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to follow
replacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.
PRODUCT CAUTIONS
Before attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiar
with the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If a
component is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safety
features are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in the
Parts List of the Instruction Book.
Avoid static charge
This unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Care
should be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel.
Use caution when measuring resistances
Any attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwise noted
in the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.
NOTE
The following features, described in this Instruction Book, are only available for firmware version
D-0150-V01.00.34 and later:
59N 20 Hz Injection Mode (Page 2-58)
IEEE curves for 51N, 51V, and 67N functions (Appendix D)
Sequence of Events Recorder (Page 4-18)
Dropout/Reset Time Delay added to IPSlogic (Page 2-91)
Response Time Delay for Communications (Page 4-3)
25 Function (does not produce a target) (Page 2-21)
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
i
Table of Contents
Chapters - Part 1 of 2 Page
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Instruction Book Contents ................................................................. 11
1.2 M-3425A Generator Protection Relay ................................................ 12
1.3 Accessories ........................................................................................ 14
Chapter 2 Application
2.1 Configuration ....................................................................................... 22
Profiles ................................................................................................ 23
Functions ............................................................................................ 23
Special Considerations ........................................................................ 23
Relay System Setup .......................................................................... 23
2.2 System Diagrams ............................................................................... 28
2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings ........................................................... 214
21 Phase Distance ........................................................................... 214
24 Overexcitation Volts/Hz .............................................................. 218
25 Sync Check ................................................................................. 221
27 Phase Undervoltage .................................................................... 225
27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral .................................. 226
32 Directional Power ........................................................................ 229
40 Loss of Field ............................................................................... 233
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent ................................................. 237
49 Stator Overload Protection ......................................................... 239
50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent,Phase & Neutral Circuits ........ 242
50BF Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Flashover ................. 244
50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase differential) ........ 246
50/27 Inadvertant Energizing ........................................................... 247
51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent ............................................ 249
51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with
Voltage Control/Restraint ................................................................. 250
59 Phase Overvoltage...................................................................... 252
59D Third Harmonic Voltage Differential ......................................... 253
59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence ...................... 255
59X Multipurpose Overvoltage (Turn-to-Turn Stator Fault
or Bus Ground Protection) ............................................................... 256
60FL VT Fuse Loss ......................................................................... 258
64B/F Field Ground Protection ........................................................ 261
64F Field Ground Protection............................................................ 261
64B Brush Lift-Off Detection ........................................................... 263
64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low Frequency
Signal Injection ................................................................................. 264
TABLE OF CONTENTS
M-3425A Generator Protection
Instruction Book
ii
M-3425A Instruction Book
Chapters - Part 1 of 2 (cont'd) Page
Chapter 2 Application (cont'd)
67N Residual Directional Overcurrent ............................................. 267
78 Out of Step.................................................................................. 270
81 Frequency .................................................................................... 273
81A Frequency Accumulators ............................................................ 275
81R Rate of Change of Frequency ...................................................... 277
87 Phase Differential .......................................................................... 278
87GD Ground (Zero Sequence) Differential ......................................... 280
Breaker Monitoring.............................................................................. 281
Trip Circuit Monitoring......................................................................... 282
IPSlogic .............................................................................................. 283
Settings and Logic .............................................................................. 285
DO/RST (Droput/Reset) Timer Feature ............................................... 287
Dropout Delay Timer ........................................................................... 287
Reset Delay Timer .............................................................................. 287
Chapter 3 Operation
3.1 Front Panel Controls ............................................................................ 31
Alphanumeric Display .......................................................................... 31
Screen Blanking .................................................................................. 31
Arrow Pushbuttons .............................................................................. 31
Exit Pushbutton ................................................................................... 31
Enter Pushbutton................................................................................. 31
Target & Status Indicators and Controls .............................................. 31
Power Supply #1 (#2) LED................................................................... 32
Relay OK LED ..................................................................................... 32
Oscillograph Recorded LED................................................................. 32
Breaker Closed LED ............................................................................ 32
Target Indicators and Target Reset ..................................................... 32
Time Sync LED ................................................................................... 32
Diagnostic LED.................................................................................... 32
Accessing Screens ............................................................................. 32
Default Message Screens .................................................................. 32
3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings ........................................................ 35
3.3 Setup Unit Data ................................................................................... 35
Setup Unit Data Entry .......................................................................... 35
Setup Unit Features That Do Not Require Data Entry .......................... 36
3.4 Setup System Data ............................................................................. 36
Configure Relay Data ........................................................................... 37
Setpoints and Time Settings ............................................................... 37
Oscillograph Recorder Data ................................................................. 38
Communications Settings .................................................................... 38
3.5 Status/Metering ................................................................................... 39
3.6 Target History ..................................................................................... 310
iii
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Remote Operation
4.1 Remote Operation............................................................................... 41
Serial Ports (RS-232) ......................................................................... 41
Serial Port (RS-485) ............................................................................. 41
Optional Ethernet Port ......................................................................... 41
Direct Connection ................................................................................ 42
Setting up the M-3425A Generator Protection
Relay for Communication..................................................................... 43
Serial Communication Settings............................................................ 43
Ethernet Communication Settings ....................................................... 43
DHCP Protocol .................................................................................... 43
Ethernet Protocols ............................................................................... 43
Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................. 44
HMI Ethernet Port Setup ..................................................................... 44
Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board .............................................. 45
IPSutil Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP............................................ 45
IPSutil Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP .......................................... 45
Installing the Modems ........................................................................ 47
4.2 Installation and Setup (IPScom
) ........................................................ 48
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................ 48
Activating Communications................................................................ 48
Overview ............................................................................................. 49
File Menu ............................................................................................ 49
Comm Menu ....................................................................................... 49
Relay Menu....................................................................................... 410
Window Menu/Help Menu ................................................................. 421
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering................................................................ 422
4.5 Cautions ............................................................................................ 427
4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts.......................................................................... 428
4.7 IPSutil Communications Software ...................................................... 429
M-3890 IPSutil ................................................................................... 429
Installation and Setup ......................................................................... 429
Installation .......................................................................................... 430
System Setup .................................................................................... 430
Overview............................................................................................. 430
Comm Menu ....................................................................................... 430
Relay Comm Command ...................................................................... 430
Ethernet Command ............................................................................. 430
Clock Command ................................................................................. 430
Security Menu .................................................................................... 431
Miscellaneous Menu ........................................................................... 431
Help Menu .......................................................................................... 432
iv
Figures - Part 1 of 2 Page
Chapter 1
1-1 M-3925A Target Module ..................................................................... 14
1-2 M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module............................. 14
Chapter 2
2-1 Setup System Dialog Box ................................................................. 26
2-2 Selection Screen for Expanded Input ............................................... 27
2-3 Pulse Relay Expanded Output Screen.............................................. 27
2-4 Latch Relay Expanded Output Screen .............................................. 27
2-5 One-Line Functional Diagram............................................................. 28
2-6 Alternative One-Line Functional Diagram
(configured for split-phase differential) .............................................. 29
2-7 Three-Line Connection Diagram....................................................... 210
2-8 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram............. 211
2-9 Function 59X Turn-to-Turn Fault Protection Three-Line
Connection Diagram ......................................................................... 212
2-10 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Three-Line
2-11 Selection Screen for Expanded I/O Initiate .................................... 214
2-12 Phase Distance (21) Coverage ........................................................ 216
2-13 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Backup........... 216
2-14 Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges ............................................ 217
2-15 Example of Capability and Protection Curves (24) ......................... 219
2-16 Volts-per-Hertz (24) Setpoint Ranges .............................................. 220
2-17 Sync Check Logic Diagrams ........................................................... 223
2-18 Sync Check (25) Setpoint Ranges .................................................. 224
2-19 Phase Undervoltage (27) Setpoint Ranges ..................................... 225
2-20 Third-Harmonic Undervoltage (27TN) Protection Characteristics ... 226
2-21 27TN Blocking Regions .................................................................... 227
2-22 Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral Circuit (27TN)
Setpoint Ranges ............................................................................... 227
2-23 Tripping on Reverse Power Flow
(Over Power with Negative Pickup) ................................................. 229
2-24 Tripping on Low Foward Power
(Under Power with Positive Pickup) ................................................ 231
2-25 Tripping on Overpower (Over Power with Positive Pickup) ........... 231
v
Table of Contents
Chapter 2 (cont'd)
2-26 Tripping on Over Reactive Power with Element #3
(Over Power, Positive Pickup and Directional Power Sensing
Set to Reactive) ............................................................................... 232
2-27 Directional Power, 3-Phase (32) Setpoint Ranges.......................... 232
2-28 Loss of Field (40) Protective Approach 1 ....................................... 235
2-29 Loss of Field (40) Protective Approach 2 ....................................... 235
2-30 Loss of Field (40) Setpoint Ranges ................................................ 236
2-31 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves .................. 238
2-32 Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46) Setpoint Ranges .................. 238
2-33 Time Constant, Function 49 ............................................................ 239
2-34 49 Function Overload Curves .......................................................... 240
2-35 Stator Thermal Protection (49) Setpoint Ranges ............................ 241
2-36 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50) Setpoint Ranges ........................... 243
2-37 Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50N) Setpoint Ranges ........... 243
2-38 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram ........................................................ 244
2-39 Breaker Failure (50BF) Setpoint Ranges ........................................ 245
2-40 Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) Setpoint Ranges ....................... 246
2-41 Inadvertent Energizing Function Logic Diagram ............................. 248
2-42 Inadvertent Energizing (50/27) Setpoint Ranges ............................ 248
2-43 Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51N) Setpoint Ranges ............. 249
2-44 Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic ......................................... 251
2-45 Inverse Time Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Voltage
Restraint (51VC/VR) Setpoint Ranges ............................................ 251
2-46 Phase Overvoltage (59) Setpoint Ranges ....................................... 252
2-47 Third Harmonic Overvoltage Scheme for Generator
Ground-Fault Protection ................................................................... 254
2-48 Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (59D) Setpoint Ranges .......... 254
2-49 Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (59N)
Setpoint Ranges ............................................................................... 255
2-50 Turn-to-Turn Stator Winding Fault Protection ................................. 257
2-51 Multipurpose Overvoltage (59X) Setpoint Ranges .......................... 257
2-52 Fuse Loss (60FL) Function Logic.................................................... 259
2-53 Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges ................................................. 260
2-54 M-3921 Field Ground Coupler .......................................................... 262
2-55 Field Ground Protection (64B/F) Setpoint Ranges ......................... 263
vi
Figures - Part 1 of 2 (cont'd) Page
Chapter 2 (cont'd)
2-56 64S Function Component Connection Diagram .............................. 266
2-57 64S Function Time Delay Pickup Current Correlation .................... 267
2-58 100% Stator Ground Protection (64S) Setpoint Ranges ................ 267
2-59 Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Trip Characteristics .......... 268
2-60 Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Setpoint Ranges............... 270
2-61 Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics ................................................... 272
2-62 Out-of-Step Protection Settings....................................................... 272
2-63 Out-of-Step (78) Setpoint Ranges ................................................... 273
2-64 Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics ............................ 275
2-65 Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges ..................................................... 275
2-66 Frequency Accumulator (81A) Example Bands .............................. 277
2-67 Frequency Accumulator (81A) Setpoint Ranges ............................. 277
2-68 Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges ................... 278
2-69 Differential Relay (87) Operating Characteristics............................ 280
2-70 Phase Differential (87) Setpoint Ranges ......................................... 280
2-71 Ground Differential (87GD) Setpoint Ranges .................................. 281
2-72 Breaker Monitor (BM) Setpoint Ranges........................................... 282
2-73 Trip Circuit Monitoring Input ............................................................ 283
2-74 Trip Circuit Monitor (TC) Setpoint Ranges ...................................... 283
2-75 IPSlogic Function Setup............................................................... 285
2-76 IPSlogic Function Programming ......................................................... 286
2-77 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout ................................ 287
2-78 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup .................................. 287
2-79 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram ................................................... 288
2-80 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram ...................................................... 288
Chapter 3
3-1 M-3425A Front Panel ......................................................................... 33
3-2 Screen Message Menu Flow ............................................................. 33
3-3 Main Menu Flow ................................................................................. 34
vii
Table of Contents
Chapter 4
4-1 Multiple System Addressing Using
Communications Line Splitter ............................................................ 42
4-2 IPScom
Menu Selections ................................................................ 46

4-3 IPScom Program Icon........................................................................ 48
4-4 New Device Profile Dialog Box.......................................................... 49
4-5 Communication Dialog Box .............................................................. 410
4-6 Setup System Dialog Box ............................................................... 411
4-7 Expanded Input Active State........................................................... 412
4-8 Pulse Relay Expanded Output Screen............................................ 412
4-9 Latch Relay Expanded Output Screen ............................................ 412
4-10 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box ............................................................. 413
4-11 Typical Setpoint Dialog Box ............................................................ 413
4-12 Expanded I/O Initiate ....................................................................... 413
4-13 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box (Partial) ......................................... 414
4-14 Configure Dialog Box (Partial) ......................................................... 415
4-15 Configure Dialog Box Partial
(shown with Expanded Input/Outputs) ............................................. 416
4-16 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box .............................................................. 417
4-17 Target Dialog Box............................................................................. 418
4-18 Trigger Events Screen with Expanded I/O ..................................... 419
4-19 Event Log Viewer ............................................................................. 419
4-20 Event Download Screen ................................................................... 420
4-21 Setup Oscillograph Recorder ........................................................... 420
4-22 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Dialog ............................................... 420
4-23 Profile Switching Method Dialog ...................................................... 420
4-24 Select Active Profile ........................................................................ 421
4-25 Copy Active Profile .......................................................................... 421
4-26 About IPScom
Dialog Box ............................................................. 421

4-27 Primary Status Dialog Box .............................................................. 422
4-28 Secondary Status Dialog Box.......................................................... 422
4-29 Accumulator Status Screen ............................................................. 423
430 Phase Distance Dialog Box ............................................................. 423
4-31 Loss of Field Dialog Box ................................................................. 424
4-32 Out of Step Dialog Box ................................................................... 424
viii
Chapter 4 (cont.)
4-33 Phasor Dialog Box ........................................................................... 425
4-34 Sync Scope Screen ......................................................................... 425
4-35 Function Status Screen ................................................................... 426
4-36 IPSutil Main Menu Flow ............................................................... 429
4-37 Warning Message ............................................................................. 430
4-38 IPSutility Reset Relay Message ..................................................... 430
4-39 Monitor Status Screen ..................................................................... 431
4-40 Calibration Dialog Box...................................................................... 431
4-41 Communication Dialog Box .............................................................. 432
4-42 Relay Comm Port Settings .............................................................. 432
4-43 Ethernet Settings.............................................................................. 432
4-44 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box .............................................................. 432
4-45 Change Communication Access Code Dialog Box ......................... 433
4-46 Change User Access Code Dialog Box .......................................... 433
4-47 Setup Dialog Box ................................................................................ 433
Tables - Part 1 of 2 Page
Chapter 1
1-1 M-3425A Device Functions .................................................................. 13
Chapter 2
2-1 Input Activated Profile ....................................................................... 23
2-2 Impedance Calculation ..................................................................... 217
2-3 Voltage Control Time Settings ......................................................... 234
2-4 Delta/Wye Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs ................................ 251
2-5 Typical Frequency Settings ............................................................. 263
2-6 Typical Brush Lift-Off Settings ........................................................ 264
2-7 Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment Part Number
Cross Reference ................................................................................. 266
Chapter 3
3-1 Recorder Partitions .............................................................................. 38
Chapter 4
4-1 Dead-Sync Time .................................................................................. 43
4-2 Protective System Firmware Association ............................................ 49
4-3 Microsoft Windows Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................. 428
ix
Table of Contents
Chapters - Part 2 of 2 Page
Chapter 5 Installation
5.1 General Information ............................................................................ 51
5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions ...................................................... 52
5.3 External Connections ....................................................................... 510
5.4 Commissioning Checkout ................................................................ 516
5.5 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers .............................................. 521
5.6 Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment .................................... 525
Chapter 6 Testing
6.1 Equipment/Test Setup........................................................................ 62
6.2 Functional Test Procedures ............................................................... 66
Power On Self Tests ......................................................................... 67
21 Phase Distance .............................................................................. 68
24 Volts per Hertz, Definite Time......................................................... 69
24 Volts per Hertz, Inverse Time ........................................................ 610
25D Dead Check ................................................................................ 612
25S Sync Check ................................................................................ 614
27 Phase Undervoltage....................................................................... 616
27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral ....................................... 617
32 Directional Power, 3-Phase............................................................ 621
40 Loss of Field .................................................................................. 624
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time .............................. 626
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time .............................. 627
49 Stator Overload Protection ......................................................... 628
50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent .............................................. 630
50BF/50BF-N Breaker Failure .......................................................... 631
50/27 Inadvertant Energizing ........................................................... 633
50DT Definite Time Overcurrent for Split-Phase Differential ......... 634
50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent ......................................... 635
51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent .......................................... 636
Voltage Control/Restraint ................................................................. 637
59 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase ........................................................ 639
59D Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential ......................................... 640
59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence ...................... 641
59X Multipurpose Overvoltage............................................................ 642
60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection ............................................................ 643
64F Field Ground Protection ............................................................... 644
64B Brush Lift Off Detection............................................................... 646
64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Injection ............................... 647
67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time .......................... 649
67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time .......................... 651
78 Out of Step .................................................................................... 653
81 Frequency...................................................................................... 655
81A Frequency Accumulator .............................................................. 656
81R Rate of Change of Frequency .................................................. 657
x
Chapter 6 Testing (cont'd)
87 Phase Differential .......................................................................... 659
87GD Ground Differential ................................................................... 661
BM Breaker Monitoring ....................................................................... 663
Trip Circuit Monitoring......................................................................... 665
IPSlogic .......................................................................................... 666
6.3 Diagnostic Test Procedures ............................................................... 667
Overview............................................................................................. 667
Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode......................................................... 667
Output Relay Test (Output Relays 123 and 25) ................................ 668
Output Relay Test (Power Supply Relay 24) ...................................... 669
Input Test (Control/Status) ................................................................. 669
Status LED Test ................................................................................. 670
Target LED Test ................................................................................. 671
Expanded Input/Output Test ............................................................... 671
Button Test ......................................................................................... 671
Display Test ....................................................................................... 672
COM1/COM2 Loopback Test .............................................................. 672
COM3 Test (2-wire) ............................................................................ 673
Clock ON/OFF.................................................................................... 674
Relay OK LED Flash/Illuminated ........................................................ 675
Auto Calibration .................................................................................. 675
Factory Use Only ............................................................................... 675
6.4 Auto Calibration .................................................................................. 676
Phase and Neutral Fundamental Calibration ....................................... 676
Third Harmonic Calibration ................................................................. 677
64S 100% Stator Ground by Low Frequency Injection Calibration ...... 677
Field Ground Calibration ..................................................................... 678
Appendices
Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms ......................................... A1
Appendix B: Communications............................................................ B1
Appendix C: Self-Test Error Codes ................................................... C1
Appendix D: Inverse Time Curves .................................................... D1
Appendix E: Layup and Storage ........................................................ E1
Appendix F: Declaration of Conformity ............................................. F1
xi
Table of Contents
Chapter 5
5-1 M-3425A Mounting Dimensions Horizontal Chassis..................... 52
5-2 M-3425A Mounting Dimensions Horizontal
Chassis (Expanded I/O) ..................................................................... 53
5-3 M-3425A Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions .......................................... 54
5-4 M-3425A Mounting Dimensions Vertical Chassis ........................ 55
5-5 (H2) Mounting Dimensions ................................................................. 56
5-6 (H3) Mounting Dimensions for GE L-2 Cabinet ................................ 57
5-9 Optional Dual Power Supply ............................................................ 510
5-10 Expanded I/O Power Supply............................................................ 510
5-11 External Connections ....................................................................... 511
5-12 Three-Line Connection Diagram....................................................... 512
5-13 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram............. 513
5-14 Function 59X Turn-to-Turn Fault Protection Three-Line
5-15 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground), Three-Line
5-16 M-3425A Circuit Board........................................................................ 523
5-17 M-3425A Circuit Board (Expanded I/O) ........................................... 524
5-18 Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment Typical Connections .... 525
5-19 20 Hz Frequency Generator Housing Panel Surface Mount .......... 526
5-20 20 Hz Frequency Generator Housing Panel Flush Mount ............... 527
5-21 20 Hz Band Pass Filter Housing Panel Surface Mount ................. 528
5-22 20 Hz Band Pass Filter Housing Panel Flush Mount ...................... 529
5-23 20 Hz Measuring Current Transformer 400-5 A CT........................ 530
Chapter 6
6-1 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1 ......................................................... 63
6-2 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V2 ......................................................... 63
6-3 Current Inputs: Configuration C1.......................................................... 64
6-4 Current Inputs: Configuration C2.......................................................... 64
6-5 Current Configuration C3...................................................................... 65
6-6 64S Test Configuration ........................................................................ 65
6-7 Field Ground Coupler .......................................................................... 645
6-8 Status LED Panel ............................................................................... 670
6-9 M-3925A Target Module Panel ........................................................... 671
xii
Figures (cont'd) Page
Chapter 6 (cont'd)
6-10 M-3931 Human/Machine Interface (HMI) Module ................................ 671
6-11 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug .............................................................. 672
6-12 RS-485 2-Wire Testing........................................................................ 674
6-13 Current Input Configuration ................................................................. 679
6-14 Voltage Input Configuration ................................................................ 679
Appendix A
A-1 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module ........................................... A6
A-2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form ............................. A7
A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form ............................................ A10
A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form ...................................................... A28
Appendix B
B-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423................................................................ B2
B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network .............................................................. B3
B-3 RS-485 Network................................................................................... B4
B-4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal ............................. B4
Appendix D
D-1 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Time Curve Family #1 (Inverse Square) ....... D2
D-2 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Time Family Curve #2 ................................... D3
D-3 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Time Curve Family #3 ................................ D4
D-4 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Time Curve Family #4 ................................ D5
D-5 BECO Definite Time Overcurrent Curve ........................................... D8
D-6 BECO Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ............................................ D9
D-7 BECO Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ................................. D10
D-8 BECO Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ........................ D11
D-9 IEC Curve #1 Inverse .................................................................. D12
D-10 IEC Curve #2 Very Inverse ......................................................... D13
D-11 IEC Curve #3 Extremely Inverse ................................................ D14
D-12 IEC Curve #4 Long Time Inverse .................................................. D15
D-13 IEEE Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves ............................................ D16
D-14 IEEE Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves .................................... D17
D-15 IEEE Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves ........................... D18
xiii
Table of Contents
Tables - Part 2 of 2 Page
Chapter 5
5-1 Jumpers ............................................................................................ 521
5-2 Dip Switch SW-1 .............................................................................. 522
5-3 Trip Circuit Monitor Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration.... 522
Chapter 6
6-1 Output Contacts ............................................................................... 668
6-2 Input Contacts .................................................................................. 669
Appendix A
A-1 Relay Configuration Table .................................................................. A2
Appendix B
B-1 Communication Port Signals ............................................................. B2
Appendix C
C-1 Self-Test Error Codes ........................................................................ C1
C-2 IPScom
Error Messages ................................................................. C2

Appendix D
D-1A M-3425A Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves ... D6
800-3425A-IB-04MC2 07/08 1998 Beckwith Electric Co.
Printed in U.S.A. (9.21.01)
xiv
Introduction 1
11
1Introduction
1.1 Instruction Book Contents ......................................................... 11
1.2 M-3425A Generator Protection Relay........................................ 12
1.3 Accessories ................................................................................ 14
1.1 Instruction Book Contents
This instruction book includes six chapters and five
Appendices.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter One summarizes relay capabilities,
introduces the instruction book contents, and
describes accessories.
Chapter 2: Application
Chapter Two is designed for the person or group
responsible for the application of the M-3425A
Generator Protection Relay. It includes functional
and connection diagrams for a typical application of
the relay; and describes the configuration process
for the unit (choosing active functions), output contact
assignment and input blocking designation. It also
illustrates the definition of system quantities and
equipment characteristics required by the protective
relay, and describes the individual function settings.
Chapter 3: Operation
Chapter Three is designed for the person(s)
responsible for the operation, direct setting, and
configuration of the relay. Chapter Three provides
information regarding the operation and interpretation
of the unit's front panel controls and indicators,
including operation of the optional M-3931, Human
Machine Interface (HMI) and M-3925A Target
Modules. It further describes the procedures for
entering all required data to the relay. Included in this
chapter is a description of the process necessary for
review of setpoints and timing, monitoring function
status and metering quantities, viewing the target
history, and setup of the oscillograph recorder.
Chapter 4: Remote Operation
Chapter 4 is designed for the person or group
responsible for the remote operation and setting of
the rel ay usi ng the M-3820D IPScom
Communications Software or other means.

Chapter 5: Installation
The person or group responsible for the installation
of the relay will find herein all mechanical information
required for physical installation, equipment ratings,
and all external connections in this chapter. For
reference, the Three-Line Connection Diagram is
repeated from Chapter 2, Application. Further, a
commissioning checkout procedure is outlined using
the HMI option to check the external CT and VT
connections. Additional tests which may be desirable
at the time of installation are described in Chapter
6, Testing.
Chapter 6: Testing
This chapter provides step-by-step test procedures
for each function, as well as diagnostic mode and
autocalibration procedures for HMI-equipped units.
Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms
This Appendix supplies a set of forms to record and
document the settings required for the proper
operation of the relay.
Appendix B: Communications
This Appendix describes port signals, protocols,
and various topologies, and equipment required for
remote communication.
12
Appendix C: Self-Test Error Codes
This Appendix lists all the error codes and their
definitions.
Appendix D: Inverse Time Curves
This Appendix contains a graph of the four families
of Inverse Time Curves for V/Hz applications, the
Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves, and the IEC
curves.
Appendix E: Layup and Storage
This Appendix includes the recommended storage
parameters, periodic surveillance activities and layup
configuration for the M-3425A Generator Protection
Relay.
Appendix F: Declaration of Conformity
This Appendix contains the Beckwith Electric Co.s
Declaration of Conformity required by ISO/IEC
170501:2004.
1.2 M-3425A Generator
Protection Relay
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is a
microprocessor-based unit that uses digital signal
processing technology to provide up to thirty-four
protective relaying functions for generator protection.
The relay can protect a generator from internal
winding faults, system faults, and other abnormal
conditions.
The available internal functions of the relay are
listed in Table 1-1. The nomenclature follows the
standards of ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.2, Standard
Electric Power Systems Device Function Numbers.
The control/status inputs can be programmed to
block any relay function and/or to trigger the
oscillograph recorder. Any of the functions or the
control/status inputs can be individually programmed
to activate any one or more of the programmable
outputs, each with a contact.
With the optional M-3931 HMI Module, all functions
can be set or examined using a local, menu-driven,
2 line by 24 character alphanumeric display. OUT
923 and IN 714 for units purchased with expanded
I/O can only be set utilizing M-3820D IPScom
Communications Software. The module allows local

metering of various quantities, including phase,
neutral, and sequence voltages and currents, real
and reactive power, power factor, and positive
sequence impedance measurements.
The relay stores time-tagged target information for
the thirty-two most recent trips. For units equipped
with the optional M-3925A Target Module, LEDs are
used to provide a detailed visual indication of
function operation for the most recent event.
The unit retains up to 472 cycles of oscillograph
waveform data. This data can be downloaded and
analyzed using the M-3801D IPSplot
PLUS
Oscillograph Analysis Software.
The unit is powered from a wide input range switch
mode power supply. An optional redundant power
supply is available for units without the Expanded
I/O. When expanded I/O option is selected, the unit
includes the second power supply.
The relay includes self-test, auto calibration, and
diagnostic capabilities, in addition to IRIG-B time-
sync capability for accurate time-tagging of events.
Introduction 1
13
Communication Ports
There are three physical communication ports
provided on the M-3425A. If the optional RJ45
Ethernet port is purchased, then the relay includes
four physical communication ports:
COM1, located on the relay front panel, is
a standard 9-pin RS-232 DTE-configured
port. COM1 is used to locally set and
interrogate the relay using a portable
computer.
COM2, located on the rear of the relay, is
a standard 9-pin RS-232 DTE-configured
port. When the optional RJ45 Ethernet
Port is enabled, COM2 port is disabled for
communications. The demodulated
IRIG-B may still be used via the COM2
Port when ethernet is enabled.
The RJ45 Ethernet port uses a 10Base-T
type connection that accepts an RJ45
connector using CAT5 twisted pair cable.
The Ethernet port supports MODBUS over
TCP/IP, BECO2200 over TCP/IP. The IP
address can be obtained automatically
when using the DHCP protocol if enabled,
or a static IP address can be manually
entered, using the HMI.
COM3, located on the rear terminal block
of the relay, is an RS-485 communications
port.
The relay may be remotely set and interrogated
utilizing either a hard-wired RS-232 serial connection
or modem (COM2 when activated as RS-232, or
COM3), or when purchased, the ethernet connection
(RJ45 activated).
M-3820D IPScom
Communications Software
IPScom is shipped standard with every relay. This
software runs on a PC-compatible computer operating
under Microsoft Windows
95 or later. When properly

connected using either a direct serial connection,
modem or ethernet network connection. IPScom
can provide the following functions:
Setpoint interrogation and modification
Line status real-time monitoring
Recorded oscillograph data downloading
N O I T C N U F N O I T P I R C S E D
s n o i t c n u F e v i t c e t o r P
1 2 o h m e n o z - e e r h t ( e c n a t s i D e s a h P
) c i t s i r e t c a r a h c
4 2 ) e m i T e t i n i f e D & e s r e v n I ( z H / s t l o V
7 2 e g a t l o v r e d n U e s a h P
N T 7 2 l a r t u e N , e g a t l o v r e d n U c i n o m r a H d r i h T
2 3 r e w o P l a n o i t c e r i D
0 4 o h m - t e s f f o e n o z - l a u d ( d l e i F f o s s o L
) c i t s i r e t c a r a h c
6 4 t n e r r u c r e v O e c n e u q e S e v i t a g e N
9 4 e v i t i s o P ( n o i t c e t o r P d a o l r e v O r o t a t S
) t n e r r u c r e v O e c n e u q e S
0 5 t n e r r u c r e v O e s a h P s u o e n a t n a t s n I
F B 0 5 e r u l i a F r e k a e r B
T D 0 5 t n e r r u c r e v O e m i T e t i n i f e D
N 0 5 t n e r r u c r e v O l a r t u e N s u o e n a t n a t s n I
7 2 / 0 5 g n i z i g r e n E t n a t r e v d a n I
N 1 5 t n e r r u c r e v O l a r t u e N e m i T e s r e v n I
V 1 5 e g a t l o V h t i w , t n e r r u c r e v O e m i T e s r e v n I
t n i a r t s e R r o l o r t n o C
9 5 e g a t l o v r e v O e s a h P
D 9 5 l a i t n e r e f f i D e g a t l o V c i n o m r a H - d r i h T
N 9 5 e g a t l o v r e v O l a r t u e N
X 9 5 e g a t l o v r e v O e s o p r u p - i t l u M
L F 0 6 n o i t c e t e D s s o L - e s u F T V
N 7 6 t n e r r u c r e v O l a n o i t c e r i D l a u d i s e R
8 7 ) c i t s i r e t c a r a h c o h m ( p e t S f o t u O
1 8 y c n e u q e r F
A 1 8 n o i t a l u m u c c A y c n e u q e r F
R 1 8 y c n e u q e r F f o e g n a h C f o e t a R
7 8 t n e r r u C l a i t n e r e f f i D e s a h P
D G 7 8 l a i t n e r e f f i D ) e c n e u q e s o r e z ( d n u o r G
S P I c i g o l S P I
M B r o t i n o M r e k a e r B
C T g n i r o t i n o M t i u c r i C p i r T
s n o i t c n u F e v i t c e t o r P l a n o i t p O
5 2 k c e h C c n y S
B 4 6 / F 4 6 / n o i t c e t o r P d n u o r G d l e i F
n o i t c e t e D f f O - t f i L h s u r B
S 4 6 y b n o i t c e t o r P d n u o r G r o t a t S % 0 0 1
n o i t c e j n I
Table 1-1 M-3425A Device Functions
14
1.3 Accessories
M-3925A Target Module
The optional target module, shown below, includes 24
individually labelled TARGET LEDs to indicate
operation of the functions on the front panel. Eight
individually labelled OUTPUT LEDs will be lit as long
as the corresponding output contact is picked up.

TARGETS
OUTPUTS
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 5
OUT 6
OUT 7
OUT 8
24 VOLTS/Hz
27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND
59N/59X NEUT/GND OVERVOLT
32 DIRECTIONAL POWER
21 PHASE DISTANCE
40 LOSS OF FIELD
78 OUT OF STEP
50BF BREAKER FAILURE
50/27INADVERTENT ENRGNG
60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS
PHASE OVERCURRENT 50
PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V
NEUTRAL O/C 50N/51N
SPLIT PHASE DIFF 50DT
STATOR OVERLOAD 49
NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT46
FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT64F/B
FREQUENCY 81/81R/81A
PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87
GND DIFF/DIR O/C87GD/67N
TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR TC
IPS LOGIC LOGIC
Figure 1-1 M-3925A Target Module
M-3933/M-0423 Serial Communication Cables
The M-3933 cable is a 10-foot RS-232 cable for use
between the relays rear panel (COM2) port and a
modem. This cable has a DB25 (25-pin) connector
(modem) and a DB9 (9-pin) at the relay end.
The M-0423 cable is a 10-foot null-modem RS-232
cable for direct connection between a PC and the
relays front panel COM1 port, or the rear COM2
port. This cable has a DB9 (9-pin) connector at
each end.
M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Module
The optional HMI module provides the means to
interrogate the relay and to input settings, access
data, etc. directly from the front of the relay. Its
operation is described in detail in Section 3.1, Front
Panel Controls.
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.
M-3425A
EXIT ENTER
a
a
a
a
Figure 1-2 M-3931 Human-Machine
Interface (HMI) Module
M-3801D IPSplot
PLUS Oscillograph Analysis

Software Package
The IPSplot PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Software
runs i n conj uncti on wi th the IPScom
Communi cati ons Software on any IBM

PC-compatible computer, enabling the plotting,
printing, and analysis of waveform data downloaded
from the M-3425A Generator Protection Relay.
Application 2
21
2 Application
2.1 Configuration............................................................................... 22
2.2 System Diagrams....................................................................... 28
2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings ................................................... 214
Menu screens in the following examples are as they
would appear on units equipped with the M-3931
Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module. The same
setting may be entered remotely using M-3820D
IPScom
Communications Software (see Chapter

4, Remote Operation).
Chapter Two is designed for the person or group
responsible for the application of the M-3425A
Generator Protection Relay. It includes functional
and connection diagrams for a typical application of
the relay; and describes the configuration process
for the unit (enabling functions), output contact
assignment and input blocking designation. It also
illustrates the definition of system quantities and
equipment characteristics required by the protective
relay, and describes the individual function settings.
22
2.1 Configuration
Configuration of the relay consists of enabling the
functions for use in a particular application,
designating the output contacts each function will
operate, and which control/status inputs will block
the function. The choices include eight programmable
output contacts (OUT1OUT8) and six control/status
inputs (IN1IN6), or OUT923 and IN714 for units
purchased with expanded I/O, plus a block choice
for fuse loss logic operation (see Section 2.3,
Setpoint and Time Settings, 60FL Fuse Loss
subsection for details).
The blocking control/status inputs and output contact
assignments must be chosen before entering the
settings for the individual functions. Both may be
recorded on the Relay Configuration Table in
Appendix A, Configuration Record Forms.
Control/status input IN1 is preassigned to be the
52b breaker status contact. If a multiple breaker
scheme is used, the control/status input IN1 must
be the series combination of the 52b breaker
contacts. Additional user-chosen control/status
inputs may initiate actions such as breaker failure,
initiate external fuse loss detection, or trigger the
oscillograph recorder.
The relay allows the user to designate up to six
logic functions which perform similarly to internal
relay functions, using IPSlogic
TM
. These external
functions may be enabled or disabled, and output
contacts and blocking control/status inputs are
chosen the same as for the internal functions. The
external functions are described in further detail in
Section 2.3, Setpoint and Time Settings, IPSlogic
subsection.
27#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
disable ENABLE
27#1 BLOCK INPUT
fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 I1
27#1 RELAY OUTPUT
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 O1
NOTE: Uppercase text indicates selection.
This menu designation is required for each relay function. After
enabling the function, the user is presented with the two following
screens:
This submenu item assigns the blocking designations (up to six, plus
fuse-loss logic) for the enabled function. OR logic is used if more than
one input is selected.
This submenu item assigns the output contacts (up to eight) for the
particular relay function. If no output contacts are assigned, the function
will not generate any output or targets even though the function is enabled.
NOTE: Units with expanded I/O can only set OUT9OUT23 and IN7IN14 using IPScom
.
Application 2
23
Profiles
Up to four setpoint profiles may be used. Each
profile contains a complete set of function
configuration and settings. One of the four profiles
may be designated as the Active Profile, which will
contain the settings that the relay will actively use.
The Active Profile may be chosen manually or by
contact input. When the profile Switching Method is
set to Manual, the HMI, remote communications or
one of the IPSlogic elements will select the Active
Profile. When the Switching Method is set to Input
Contact, the profile is selected by the input contacts.
When Input Contact is selected, only the input
contacts can switch the relays profile, and none of
the Manual methods will switch the profile.
A Copy Profile feature is available. This feature
copies an image of the Active Profile to any one of
the other three profiles. This feature can speed up
the configuration process. Consider, for example, a
situation where a breaker will be removed from
service. Two profiles will be used: an In Service
profile (Profile 1), and an Out of Service profile
(Profile 2).
Profile 2 will be identical to the In Service profile,
with the exception of the overcurrent settings.
Profile 1 is set to be the Active Profile, and all
setpoints entered. An image of Profile 1 will then be
copied to Profile 2 with the Copy Active Profile
command. Profile 2 is then selected as the Active
Profile, and the overcurrent setpoints modified.
CAUTION: During profile switching, relay operation
is disabled for approximately 1 second.
Functions
Configuration of the relay consists of enabling the
functions for use in a particular application,
designating the output contacts each function will
operate, and which control/status inputs will block
the function. The choices include eight programmable
output contacts (OUT1OUT8) and six control/status
inputs (IN1IN6)/(OUT1OUT23 and IN1IN14 for
expanded I/O units) plus a block choice for fuse
loss logic operation (see Section 2.3, Setpoint and
Time Settings, 60FL Fuse Loss subsection for
details.)
Control/status inputs may also initiate actions, such
as Breaker Failure Initiate, Trigger Oscillograph
Recorder, Switch Setpoint Profile, or initiate an
IPSlogic function. The control/status inputs and
output contacts need to be chosen before configuring
the individual functions. Both can be recorded on
the Relay Configuration Table in Appendix A, Forms.
Special Considerations
Control/status input IN1 is preassigned to be the
52b breaker contact. IN5 and IN6 may be used to
select setpoint profiles.
Outputs 16 and 923 are form a contacts (normally
open), and outputs 7 and 8 are form c contacts
(center tapped a and b normally closed) contacts.
Output contacts 14 contain special circuitry for
high-speed operation and pick up 4 ms faster than
outputs 58. Function 87 outputs are recommended
to be directed to OUT1 through OUT4 contacts.
Relay System Setup
The system setup consists of defining all pertinent
information regarding the system quantities. Setup
screens shown here may be accessed through the
SYSTEM SETUP menu. Regardless of the functions
that are enabled or disabled, all System Setup
values are required to be input. Several functions
require proper setting of these values for correct
operation. The Nominal Voltage and Nominal Current
settings are needed for proper normalization of per
unit quantities. CT and VT ratios are used only in
monitoring and displaying system primary quantities.
Input 5 Input 6 Selection
Open Open Profile 1
Closed Open Profile 2
Open Closed Profile 3
Closed Closed Profile 4
Table 2-1 Input Activated Profile
24
INPUT ACTIVATED PROFILES
disable enable
ACTIVE SETPOINT PROFILE
________________
COPY ACTIVE PROFILE
TO_PROFILE_1
NOMINAL VOLTAGE
_____________ Volts
NOMINAL CURRENT
______________ Amps
VT CONFIGURATION
line-line line-ground
line-gnd_to_line-line
DELTA-Y TRANSFORM
dis delta_ab delta_ac
PHASE ROTATION
a-c-b a-b-c
When Input Activated Profiles is disabled, the Active Profile can be
selected using HMI or remote communication. When enabled, the
Active Profile is selected by the state of Input 5 and 6 (see Table 2-1).
This screen sets the active setpoint profile.
This screen initiates a copy of the Active Profile to any one of the
other profiles.
The secondary VT voltage when primary voltage is equal to the
rated generator voltage. V
nominal
=( V gen rated I VT ratio) for L-L
VT connections. V
nominal
=(Vgen rated I (S3 VT ratio)) for L-G VT
connections.
The secondary CT current of the phase CTs with rated generator
current. I nom = (VA I (Vgen rated(S3) )(CT ratio) )
Indicates VT connection. (See Figure 2-7, Three-Line Connection
Diagram.) When line-ground voltages are used, functions 24, 27, and
59 may operate for line-ground faults. If this is not desired, the line-gnd-
to-line-line selection should be used to prevent operation of these
functions for line-ground faults.When line-gnd-to-line-line is selected,
the relay internally calculates line-line voltages from line-ground voltages
for all voltage-sensitive functions. This line-gnd-to-line-line selection
should be used only for a VT line-to-ground nominal secondary voltage
of 69V (not for 120 V). For this selection, the nominal voltage setting
entered should be line-line nominal voltage, which is S3 times line-ground
nominal voltage, and voltage function pickup setpoints calculation
should be made using line-to-line voltage.
When the generator is connected through a Delta-Y (delta ab or delta
ac) unit transformer, the relay will internally consider the 30 phase
shift for 51V and 21 functions.It defines the connection of the Delta
windings of the Delta /Y transformer. If the polarity of the A winding
is connected to the non-polarity of the C winding, it is defined as
Delta-AC and if the polarity of the A winding is connected to the non-
polarity of the B winding, then it is defined as Delta-AB. In the ABC
phase rotation, delta lags Y by 30 degrees in Delta-AC and delta
leads Y by 30 degrees in Delta-AB.
This screen allows the user to select the phase rotation of the
M-3425A to match the generator.
Application 2
25
This screen allows the selection of RMS or DFT for the 59 and 27
functions. The magnitude can be selected as the RMS of the total
waveform (including harmonics) or the RMS of the 60/50 Hz fundamental
component of the waveform using the Discrete Fourier Transform
(DFT). When the RMS option is selected, the magnitude calculation
is accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz) and the accuracy
of the time delay is +20 cycles. When the DFT option is selected, the
magnitude calculation is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz and the timer
accuracy is K1 cycle. When a wider frequency response is needed,
select RMS. For generator protection applications, it is recommended
to use the RMS selection. RMS is the default when shipped from the
factory. For 59 function when positive sequence voltage is selected,
the calculation uses DFT irrespective of DFT/RMS selection.
If the 50DT function is to be used for split-phase differential protection,
this selection should be enabled. If the 50DT function is to be used
as a definite time overcurrent function, or if 50DT is not enabled, this
selection should be disabled.
If pulse relay operation is selected, output will dropout after the seal-
in delay expires, even if the condition which caused the relay to pick
up is still out of band. When selected, latching outputs are not
available.*
If any of the outputs are selected as latched, then after tripping, this
output will stay activated, even when the tripping condition is removed.
The Latched Output can be reset using the TARGET RESET
pushbutton. When selected, Pulse Relay is not available. *
Minimum time the output contact will remain picked up to ensure
proper seal-in, regardless of the subsequent state of the initiating
function. Individual Seal-In settings are available for all outputs.*
This designates the active state for the individual status input.
Programming uppercase (see I6) causes the active or operated
condition to be initiated by the external contact opening. Otherwise,
external contact closure will activate the input.*
* NOTE: Settings for expanded I/O must be made through IPScom
.
Ratio of the phase VTs. Example: 13,800 V : 120 V =13,800/120=115:1
Ratio of the neutral VT. Example: 13,800 V : 120 V =13,800/120=115:1
Ratio of auxiliary VT. Example: 13,800 V : 120 V =13,800/120=115:1
Ratio of phase CTs. Example: 3,000:5 = 3000/5=600:1
Ratio of neutral CT. Example: 3,000:5 = 3000/5=600:1
59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECT
rms dft
50DT SPLIT-PHASE DIFF
disable enable
PULSE RELAY
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
LATCHED OUTPUTS
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT1
_____________ Cycles
ACTIVE INPUT OPEN/close
I6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
V.T. PHASE RATIO
______________ : 1
V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO
_______________ :1
V.T. VX RATIO
_______________ :1
C.T. PHASE RATIO
______________ : 1
C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO
______________ : 1
26
SETUP SYSTEM
Note: Pulse/Latched Relay Outputs should be selected in 2 steps
i)Deselect Latched/Pulse Relay Outputs and Save
ii) Select Pulse/Latched Outputs and Save
Nominal Frequency: 60 Hz C.T. Secondary Rating: 5A
Input Active State Expanded
Save Cancel
Nominal Voltage: 120
Nominal Current: 5.00
140.0 V 50.0 V
6.00 A 0.50 A
Delta-Y Transform
Disable Delta-AB Delta-AC
Open
Cl ose
Open
Cl ose
Open
Cl ose
Open
Cl ose
Open
Cl ose
6 5 4 3 2 1
Open
Cl ose
Input Active State:
1. 0
1. 0
1. 0
10
10
V.T. Configuration:
59/27 Mag. Select:
Phase Rotation:
V.T. Phase Ratio:
V.T. Neutral Ratio:
V.T. VX Ratio
C.T. Phase Ratio:
C.T. Neutral Ratio:
Outputs: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pulse Relay
Injection Frequency for F64S: 20 Hz
Li ne t o Gr ound Li ne t o Li ne Li ne- Gr ound t o Li ne- Li ne
RMS DFT
ABC ACB
50DT
Split Phase
Differential:
Enable
Disable
Outputs:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Latched Outputs
Pulse Relay Expanded Outputs
Latch Relay Expanded Outputs
Relay Seal-In Time
OUT 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
2
cycles
8160
cycles
8160
cycles
OUT 9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
2
cycles
OUT 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
Relay Seal-In Time Expanded
SETUP
:1
:1
:1
:1
:1
1.0
1.0
1.0
1
1
6550.0
6550.0
6550.0
65500
65500
Figure 2-1 Setup System Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setup System command
COMMAND BUTTONS
Input Active When the unit is equipped with expanded I/O, this command opens the Expanded Input Active
State State screen (Figure 2-2), to allow the selection of Expanded Inputs 7 through 14.
Expanded
Pulse/Latch When the unit is equipped with expanded I/O, this command opens the Pulse/Latch
Relay screen (Figures 2-3 and 2-4) to allow the selection of expanded outputs 9 through 23.
Expanded
Outputs
Save When connected to a protection system, sends the currently displayed information to the unit.
Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information.
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom
main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the operated state established by
an opening rather than a closing external contact.
Application 2
27
Expanded Input Active State
OK
Cancel
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
? X
Figure 2-2 Selection Screen for Expanded Input
? X
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
OUTPUT17
OUTPUT18
OUTPUT19
OUTPUT20
OUTPUT21
OUTPUT22
OUTPUT23
OK
Cancel
Figure 2-3 Pulse Relay Expanded Output Screen
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
OK
Cancel
? X
OUTPUT17
OUTPUT18
OUTPUT19
OUTPUT20
OUTPUT21
OUTPUT22
OUTPUT23
Figure 2-4 Latch Relay Expanded Output Screen
28
2.2 System Diagrams
50
DT
Utility System
52
Unit
52
Gen
50
BFPh
87
49 21 32 50 40 78
60
FL
51V 50/27
27
81R 81 27 59 24
64F 64B
M-3921
+
-
CT
VT
M-3425A
87
GD
50N
50
BFN
51N
R
64S
27
TN
27
32
R
Low-impedance Grounding with Ground Differential
and Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection
M-3425A Typical
Connection Diagram
25
59D
VT (Note 1)
Targets
(Optional)
Integral HMI
(Optional)
Metering
Waveform Capture
IRIG-B
Front RS232
Communication
Multiple Setting
Groups
Programmable I/O
Self Diagnostics
Dual Power Supply
(Optional)
Rear Ethernet
Port (Optional)
Rear RS-485
Communication
Breaker
Monitoring
Trip Circuit
Monitoring
67N
67N Polarization
(Software Select)
81A
50N
50
BFN
51N
46
59X
59N
3V
O
(Calculated)
V
X
V
N
3I
O
I
N
67N Operating Current
(Software Select)
VT (Note 1)
(Note 3)
(Note 5)
CT (Residual)
(Note 4)
59D Line Side
Voltage
(Software Select)
V
X
3V
O
(Calculated)
CT (Neutral)
(Notes 2 & 5)
CT
M
(Metering)
M
(Metering)
Rear RS232
Communication
Event Log
NOTES:
X
and 67N with V
X
2. When 67N function with I
N
(Residual) operating current is enabled, 87GD is not available, and vice
versa.
3. The 50BFN, 50N, and 51N may utilize either the neutral current or the residual current.
4. When used as a turn-to-turn fault protection device.
5. The current input I
N
can be either from neutral current or residual current.
N
or V
N
Figure 2-5 One-Line Functional Diagram
Application 2
29
Utility System
52
Unit
52
Gen
81R 81 59 27 24
M-3921
+
-
VT
CT
M-3425A
50N 51N
R
CT
27
32
R
Low-impedance Grounding with
Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection
M-3425A Typical
Connection Diagram
(Configured for Split-Phase Differential)
25
59D
50
DT
67N
Targets
(Optional)
Integral HMI
(Optional)
Metering
Waveform Capture
IRIG-B
Front RS232
Communication
Multiple Setting
Groups
Programmable I/O
Self Diagnostics
Dual Power Supply
(Optional)
Rear Ethernet
Port (Optional)
Rear RS-485
Communication
Breaker
Monitoring
Trip Circuit
Monitoring
27
TN
81A
46 49 21 32 50 40 78 60FL 51V 50/27
27
64F 64B
59X
64S 59N
CT (Residual)
(Note 5)
VT (Note 1)
VT (Note 1)
67N Polarization
(Software Select)
3V
O
(Calculated)
V
X
V
N
(Note 2)
CT (Note 3)
(Note 4)
59D Line Side
Voltage
(Software Select)
V
X
3V
O
(Calculated)
CT (Neutral)
(Note 5)
M
(Metering)
M
(Metering)
Rear RS232
Communication
Event Log
NOTES:
1. When 25 function is enabled, 59, 59X, 59D with V
X
and 67N with V
X
are not available, and vice
versa.
2. When used as a turn-to-turn fault protection device.
3. CTs are connected as split-phase differential current.
4. 67N operating current can only be selected to I
N
(Residual) for this configuration.
5. The current input (I
N
) can be either from neutral current or residual current.
N
or V
N
Figure 2-6 Alternative One-Line Functional Diagram (configured for split-phase differential)
210
52
Gen
A B C
Generator
58 59
56 57
54 55
Other
Relays
R
45 44
M-3425A
M-3425A
WARNING: ONLY dry contact inputs must be
connected because these contact inputs are
internally wetted. Application of external
voltage on these inputs may result in
damage to the units.
NOTE: M-3425A current terminal polarity marks
( . ) indicate "entering" current direction when
primary current is "from" the generator to the
system. If CT connections differ from those
shown, adjust input terminals.
M-3921
Field Ground
Coupler Module
10
11
52b
M-3425A
43 41 39 42 40 38
M-3425A
Two Vt Open-Delta
Connection
43 41 39 42 40 38
M-3425A
Three VT Wye-Wye
Connection
43 41 39 42 40 38
M-3425A
Three VT Wye-Wye
Alternate Connection
A
B
C
A
B
C
55 54
57 56
59 58
M-3425A
55 54
57 56
59 58
M-3425A
Other
Relays
Other
Relays
a b c
a b c a b c
OR OR
High Impedance Grounding
52 53
M-3425A
R Low Impedance Grounding
OR
50 51
48 49
46 47
M-3425A
Other
Relays
1
1
1
A B C
Example of Control/Output Connections
M-3425A
Power
Supply
52G
+
-
TRIP
ALARM
SELF-
TEST
FAILURE
ALARM
POWER
OK
STATUS
ALARM
VT
FUSE
LOSS
EXTERNAL
INPUTS
ALARM
OUTPUTS
CONTROL
OUTPUTS
TRIP
OUTPUT
BREAKER
FAILURE
INITIATE
52Ga
5
3 3 3 6
OSCILLOGRAPH
RECORDER
INITIATE
60FL 52b
2
60 62
61 63 11 10
4
+
-
DC: 24V
48V
OR
DC: 110V
125V
220V
250V
AC: 110V
120V
230V
240V
16
15
12
13
4
5
6
Alarm output can be grouped to a single alarm
at the discretion of user.
Available control output to service other relays
for VT Fuse Loss can be designated.
Input contact number is designated by user.
2
3
1 Wire to split phase differential CTs for
use with 50DT split phase function.
Required generator breaker status input
(52b). Contact is closed when generator
breaker is open. Use unit breaker
contact if no generator breaker present.
Output contact pairs designated by
user.
Figure 2-7 Three-Line Connection Diagram
Application 2
211
52
Gen
A B C
Generator
10
11
52b
M-3425A
V
X
43
41
39
42
40
38
M-3425A
Three VT Wye-Wye
Connection
A B C
OR
V
X
64
65
M-3425A
64
65
M-3425A
V
X
Two VT Open-Delta
Connection
43
41
39
42
40
38
M-3425A
OR
A B C
Used when Generator
Side VTs are connected
Line-Ground.
Used when Generator Side VTs
are connected Line-Line
Used for Sync Check (25)
NOTE: When V
X
is connected for Sync Check function (25), turn-to-turn fault protection (59X) is not
available.
Figure 2-8 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram
212
52
Gen
A B C
Generator
10
11
52b
M-3425A
a b c
52 53
M-3425A
R
Low Impedance Grounding
65
64
M-3425A
A B C
Line to Neutral
Voltage Rated
Cable
R
R
45 44
M-3425A
OR
V
X
used for turn-to-turn
fault protection (59X)
V
X
NOTE: When V
X
is connected for turn-to-turn fault protection, 59X and 25 functions are not available.
Figure 2-9 Function 59X Turn to Turn Fault Protection Three-Line Connection Diagram
Application 2
213
52
Gen
A B C
Generator
10
11
52b
M-3425A
a b c
52 53
M-3425A
R
Low Impedance Grounding
A
B
C
I
N
input can be connected
either at Neutral or as Residual.
I
N
input can be connected
either at Neutral or as Residual.
OR
R
45 44
M-3425A
65 64
M-3425A
R
59X
Bus Ground
65
64
M-3425A
A B C
R
67N, 59D
Connection
53
52
M-3425A
67N
Connection
Residual CT
Bus Section
V
X
V
X
can be used for both 67N and
59D if connected in this manner.
NOTE: When V
X
is connected for bus ground protection (59X, 67N, or 59D) , 25 function is not available.
Figure 2-10 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Three-Line Connection Diagram
214
If Zone 1 is not set to see the transmission system,
out-of-step blocking is not recommended.
When Zone 3 is used for Out-of-step blocking, the
out of step delay is used for the detection of the
transit time of the swing between Zone 3 and Zone
2 impedances.
The load encroachment blinder function can be set
with a reach and an angle as shown in Figure 2-13.
When enabled, this feature will block the 21 Function
from misoperating during high load conditions.
When the generator is connected to the system through
a delta/wye transformer, proper voltages and currents
(equivalent to the high side of the transformer) must be
used in order for the relay to see correct impedances
for system faults. By enabling the Delta-Y Transform
feature (see Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay System
Setup), the relay can internally consider the 30 phase
shift (30 lead delta-ab or 30 lag delta-ac) through the
delta/wye transformer, saving auxiliary VTs. Impedance
calculations for various VT connections are shown in
Table 2-2. All impedance settings are secondary relay
quantities and can be derived from the following formula:
Z
SEC
= Z
PRI
x (R
C
R
V
)
where Z
SEC
= secondary reflected impedance, Z
PRI
=
primary impedance, R
C
= current transformer ratio,
and R
V
= voltage transformer ratio.
The minimum current sensitivity depends on the
programmed reach (diameter and offset). If the
current is below the minimum sensitivity current,
the impedance calculated will saturate, and not be
accurate. This will not cause any relay misoperation.
An overcurrent supervision feature can be enabled,
which will block the 21 function when all three
phase currents are below the pickup value.
2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings
The individual protective functions, along with their
magnitude and timing settings are described in the
following pages. Settings for disabled functions do
not apply. Some menu and setting screens do not
appear for functions that are disabled or not
purchased. Menu screens are as they would appear
on units equipped with the M-3931 HMI Module.
The same setting may be entered using M-3820D
IPScom Communications Software.
For those units equipped with Expanded I/O, setting
of Expanded Inputs and Outputs is accomplished
by selecting Expanded I/O from the individual
function screen. IPScom
will display the Expanded

I/O Initiate dialog screen (Figure 2-11).
21 Phase Distance
The Phase Distance function (21) is designed for
system phase fault backup protection and is
implemented as a three-zone mho characteristic.
Three separate distance elements are used to detect
AB, BC, and CA fault types. The ranges and
increments are shown in Figure 2-14. The diameter,
offset, system impedance angle (relay characteristic
angle), and definite time delay need to be selected
for each zone for coordination with the system
relaying in the specific application.
Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3 may be used for backup
protection for unit transformer and transmission
faults. Zone 3 in conjunction with Zone 2 can be
used to detect an Out of Step condition and it can
be programmed to block Function 21 #1 and/or 21
#2. If Zone 3 is being used for out-of-step blocking,
it does not trip.
OK
Cancel
Expanded Output Initiate
Expanded Input
Initiate
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
OUTPUT17
OUTPUT18
OUTPUT19
OUTPUT20
OUTPUT21
OUTPUT22
OUTPUT23
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
? X
Figure 2-11 Selection Screen for Expanded I/O Initiate
Application 2
215
21 #1 DIAMETER
______________ Ohms
21 #1 OFFSET
______________ Ohms
21 #1 IMPEDANCE ANGLE
____________ Degrees
21#1 LOAD ENCROACHMENT
disable ENABLE
21 #1 LOAD ENCR ANGLE
____________ Degrees
21 #1 LOAD ENCR R REACH
______________ Ohms
21 #1 OC SUPERVISION
disable enable
21 #1 OC SUPERVISION
______________ Amps
21 #1 OUT OF STEP BLOCK
disable enable
21 #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
21 #3 OUT OF STEP DELAY
_____________ Cycles
Typically the first zone of protection is set to an impedance value
enough in excess of the first external protective section (typically
the unit transformer) to assure operation for faults within that
protective zone. See Figure 2-12, Phase Distance (21) Coverage.
A negative or positive offset can be specified to offset the mho
circle from the origin. This offset is usually set at zero. See Figure
2-13, Phase Distance (21) Function Applied For System Backup.
The impedance angle should be set as closely as possible to the
actual impedance angle of the zone being protected.
When enabled the 21 Function is blocked when the impedance
falls within the zone but above the R Reach and below the Load
Encroachment angle.
NOTE: The 21 #2 and #3 zone settings can be set for an additional
external section of protection on the system (typically transmission
Zone 1 distance relays) plus adequate overreach. #2 and #3 screens
are identical to those in #1. Element #3 also includes out-of-step
time delay when out-of-step blocking is enabled for Zone #1 and/or
Zone #2.
When enabled, the overcurrent supervision blocks the 21 Func-
tion when all three phase currents are below the pickup.
When enabled the 21 Function is blocked on the detection of an
out-of-step condition.
The time delays are set to coordinate with the primary protection
of those overreached zones and, when applicable, with the breaker
failure schemes associated with those protective zones.
In Zone #3 when out-of-step blocking is enabled for Zone #1 or #2.
216
3
21
52
Protected Range Zone 1
+X
+R
X
R
M-3425A
52
Bus
52
Figure 2-12 Phase Distance (21) Coverage
NOTE: The reach settings of the distance elements (21) should not include generator impedance since
the distance measurement starts at the VT location. However, since the neutral side CTs are
used for this function, backup protection for generator Phase-to-Phase faults is also provided
+jX
+R
jX
R
R2
R1
2 1
Circle
Diameters
Unit Transformer
Transmission Line
ZONE 1
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
Block
Block
R1 Zone 1 Load Encroachment Blinder R Reach
R2 Zone 2 Load Encroachment Blinder R Reach
1 Zone 1 Load Encroachment Blinder Angle
2 Zone 2 Load Encroachment Blinder Angle
Impedance Angle Setting
NOTE: Zone #3 is used for power swing detection in this example.
Figure 2-13 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Backup
Application 2
217
Transformer Direct
Connected
Transformer Delta-AC Connected
AB Fault
BC Fault
CA Fault
L-L or L-G to L-L
VT Connection
L-G
VT Connection
L-G
V
AB
I
a
I
b
V
BC
I
b
I
c
V
CA
I
c
I
a
V
A
V
B
I
a
I
b
V
B
V
C
I
b
I
c
V
C
V
A
I
c
I
a
V
BC
V
AB
(3)I
b
V
B
V
0
I
b
V
AB
V
CA
(3)I
a
V
A
V
0
I
a
V
CA
V
BC
(3)I
c
V
C
V
0
I
c
L-L or L-G to L-L
Transformer Delta-AB Connected
VT Connection
L-G
V
AB
V
CA
(3)I
a
V
a
V
0
I
a
V
CA
V
BC
(3)I
c
V
c
V
0
I
c
V
BC
V
AB
(3)I
b
V
b
V
0
I
b
L-L or L-G to L-L
Table 2-2 Impedance Calculation
#1 #2 #3
@ : WARNING, You have not selected an output!
Out of Step Block Enable
Out of Step Block Disable
100.0 Ohm(s)
100.0 Ohm(s)
90
90
100.0 Ohm(s)
8160 Cycles
Enable
Disable
0.1 Ohm
-100.0 Ohm(s)
0
1
0.1 Ohm
1 Cycle
0.1 A
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Impedance Angle:
Load Encr. Angle:
Load Encr. R Reach:
Delay:
Overcurrent SV:
(21) PHASE DISTANCE
X ?
20 A
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Cancel
Save
Expanded I/Os
Enable
Disable
Figure 2-14 Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges
218
24 Overexcitation Volts/Hz
The Volts-Per-Hertz function (24) provides
overexcitation protection for the generator and unit-
connected transformers. This function incorporates
two definite time elements which can be used to
realize traditional two-step overexcitation protection.
In addition, the relay includes an inverse time
element that provides superior protection by closely
approximating the combined generator/unit
transformer overexcitation curve. Industry standard
inverse time curves may be selected along with a
linear reset rate which may be programmed to
match specific machine cooling characteristics. The
percent pickup is based on the Nominal Voltage
setting and the nominal frequency. The V/Hz function
provides reliable measurements of V/Hz up to 200%
for a frequency range of 280 Hz. The ranges and
increments are presented in Figure 2-16.
Setting this relay function involves determining the
desired protection levels and operating times. The
first step is to plot the combined generator and
associated unit transformer overexcitation capability
limits. This data is typically available from the
manufacturer and should be plotted on the same
vol tage base. Dependi ng on the resul ti ng
characteristic, one of the four families of inverse
time curves (as shown in Appendix D, Inverse
Time Curves) can be matched to provide the
protection. The two definite time elements can be
used to further shape the protection curve or provide
an alarm.
Figure 2-15 illustrates a composite graph of generator
and transformer limits, a chosen inverse time curve
and pickup, and a definite time pickup and delay.
24DT #1 PICKUP
_______________ %
24DT #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
24DT #2 PICKUP
_______________ %
24DT #2 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
24IT PICKUP
_______________ %
24IT CURVE
crv#1 crv#2 crv#3 crv#4
24IT TIME DIAL
________________
24IT RESET RATE
____________ Seconds
Definite time setpoint #1 establishes the V/Hz level above which the
protection operating time will be fixed at the definite time delay #1.
Delay time #1 establishes the operation time of the protection for
all V/Hz values above the level set by definite time setpoint #1.
Definite time setpoint #2 could be programmed to alarm, alerting the
operator to take proper control action to possibly avoid tripping.
Time to operation at any V/Hz value exceeding Definite time setting
#2.
The pickup value is the V/Hz value at which the chosen inverse
curve begins protective operation. Typical value is 105%.
Allows the user to designate the appropriate curve family for this
protection application. These curves are shown in Appendix D,
Inverse Time Curves.
The appropriate curve in the family is designated by the associated
K value of the curve.
The value entered here should be the time needed for the unit to
cool to normal operating temperature if the V/Hz excursion time
was just under the trip time.
Application 2
219
M-3425A Firmware Versions D-0114VXX.XX.XX
and Earlier
NOTE: When the inverse time element is
enabled, the definite time element #1
must be enabled which will provide
definite minimum time setting for the
inverse time curve.
The following steps must be followed when setting
the inverse time element and definite time element
#1:
1. The pickup of the inverse time element
must be less than the pickup of the
definite time element #1
2. The operating time of the inverse time
element at the definite time element #1
pickup should be greater than the definite
time element #1 time delay setting
(A2>A1 in Figure 2-15).
3. When the inverse time element is
enabled, definite time element #1 should
not be used for alarm. Only definite time
element #2 can be used for alarm.
After any V/Hz excursion, cooling time must also
be taken into account. If the unit should again be
subjected to high V/Hz before it has cooled to
normal operating levels, damage could be caused
before the V/Hz trip point is reached. For this
reason, a linear reset characteristic, adjustable to
take into account the cooling rate of the unit, is
provided. If a subsequent V/Hz excursion occurs
before the reset characteristic has timed out, the
time delay will pick up from the equivalent point (as
a %) on the curve. The Reset Rate setting entered
should be time needed for the unit to cool to normal
operating temperature if the V/Hz excursion time
was just under the trip point.
M-3425A Firmware Version D-0150V 01.00.34
The inverse time element has a definite minimum
time of 30 cycles. Definite Time Element #1 is
independent, and has no effect on inverse time
elements.
M-3425A Firmware Version D-0150V 01.04.00
The inverse time element has a definite minimum
time of 60 cycles. Definite Time Element #1 is
independent, and has no effect on inverse time
elements.
Percentage Volts/Hz
100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
T
i
m
e

i
n

M
i
n
u
t
e
s
Inverse Time Pickup
Generator Limit Curve
Transformer Limit Curve
on Generator Base
Inverse Square Curve
K = 5
Combined Protection
Curve
Definite Time Pickup
Definite Time Delay (A1)
A2
A1
Inverse Time Delay at Definite
Time Pickup #1 (A2)
Figure 2-15 Example of Capability and Protection Curves (24)
220
(24) - VOLTS/HZ
F24
Pickup:
Delay:
100%
30 Cycles
200%
8160 Cycles
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
Def. Time #1
Expanded I/Os
Pickup:
Delay:
100%
30 Cycles
200%
8160 Cycles
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
Def. Time #2
Inv. Time
Pickup:
Time Dial:
Reset Rate:
100% 200%
Curves: #1 #2 #3 #4
1
1 Sec
100
999 Secs
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Figure 2-16 Volts-Per-Hertz (24) Setpoint Ranges
Application 2
221
25 Sync Check
NOTE: The 25 function cannot be enabled under
any one of the following conditions:
67N (Residual Directional Overcurrent)
is enabled and the polarizing quantity
has been set to V
X
.
59D is enabled and the line side voltage
is set to V
X
.
59X is connected for turn-to-turn fault
protection or bus ground protection.
The Synchronism (Sync) Check function (25) is
used to ensure that the voltage magnitude, phase
angle and frequency of the generator (V1) and the
utility system (V
X
) are within acceptable limits before
the generator is synchronized with the system.
Generator voltage (V1) can be selected as A, B, or
C (line-to-ground and line-ground to line-line) or AB,
BC, or CA (line-to-line).
The sync check function includes phase angle,
delta frequency, and delta voltage checks.
Phase Angle Check
The phase angle is considered acceptable when the
selected sync phase voltage (V1) and system
voltage (V
X
) are within the Upper Volt Limit and
Lower Volt Limit window and the measured phase
angle is within the phase angle window.
Phase angle window is defined as twice the Phase
Angle Limit setting. For example, if the Phase
Angle Limit is set at 10 degrees, a phase angle
window of 20 degrees exists between 10 degrees
and +10 degrees. The logic diagram of the phase
angle check is shown in Figure 2-17.
Delta Voltage and Delta Frequency Check
Delta Voltage and Delta Frequency elements may
be individually enabled or disabled, as desired. The
Delta Voltage check will compare the absolute
difference between the selected sync phase voltage
(V1) and the measured system voltage (V
X
) with the
Delta Voltage Limit setting. Likewise, the Delta
Frequency measures the frequency difference
between V1 and V
X
voltage signals. The Phase
Angle Check, Delta Voltage and Delta Frequency
Check all combine through an appropriate timer with
the output directed to the programmed 25S output
contact. A logic diagram representing this logic is
presented in Figure 2-17.
Dead Line/Dead Bus Check
The Dead Volt Limit defines the Hot/Dead voltage
level used in Deadline/Dead Bus closing schemes.
When the measured V
X
voltage is equal to or below
the Dead Volt Limit, V
X
is considered dead. When
the measured V
X
is above the Dead Volt Limit, V
X
is
considered hot. The opposite side of the breaker
uses the positive sequence voltage measurement
(V1) for 3-phase consideration in determining hot/
dead detection. Different combinations of hot line/
dead bus closings may be selected, depending on
how the buses are referenced. A logic diagram of
the Deadline/Dead Bus scheme is presented in
Figure 2-17.
The Dead V1, Dead V
X
, and Dead V1 & V
X
enable
are software switches used to enable the dead line/
dead bus logic. Further conditioning can be performed
on the dead detection logic by selecting one or
more input contacts (Dead Input Enable) to control
the enabled dead detection element. For example,
if INPUT2 (I2) is selected under the Dead Input
Enable screen, and both the Dead V1 and Dead V
X
elements are enabled, the dead check timer will
start when INPUT2 is activated, and either V1
dead/V
X
hot or V1 hot/V
X
dead. This allows for
external control of the desired dead closing scheme.
Dead Input Enable selections are common to all
dead detection elements. If no inputs are selected
under the Dead Input Enable screen, and any dead
element is enabled, the dead check timer will start
immediately when the dead condition exists.
The 25S and 25D can be programmed to be sent to
two different contacts, if desired.
NOTE: The 25 function does not produce a target
or LED and is accompanied by the HMI
message F25 Function Operated.
222
If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:
25S PHASE LIMIT
Degrees
25S UPPER VOLT LIMIT
Volts
25S LOWER VOLT LIMIT
Volts
25S SYNC CHECK DELAY
Cycles
25S DELTA VOLT
disable ENABLE
25S DELTA VOLT LIMIT
Volts
25S DELTA FREQUENCY
disable ENABLE
25S DELTA FREQ LIMIT
Hz
25S SYNC-CHECK PHASE
a b c
25D DEAD VOLT LIMIT
Volts
25D DEAD V1 HOT VX
disable ENABLE
25D DEAD VX HOT V1
disable ENABLE
25D DEAD V1 & VX
DISABLE enable
25D DEAD INPUT ENABLE
i6 i5 i4 I3 i2 i1
25D DEAD DELAY
Cycles
Phase angle setting.
Upper voltage limit for voltage acceptance.
Lower voltage limit for voltage acceptance.
Sync check time delay.
Delta voltage element.
Delta voltage setting.
Delta frequency element.
Delta frequency setting.
Selects the phase voltage on the generator side for Sync Check func-
tions (A, B, or C for line-to-ground and line-ground to line-line, and AB,
BC, CA for line-to-line)
Voltage less than this setting is defined as DEAD; above this set-
ting as HOT.
Enables Dead V1/Hot V
X
setting.
Enables Hot V1/Dead V
X
setting.
Enables Dead V1/Dead V
X
closing.
Externally controlled dead closing. Inputs IN7IN14 must be set us-
ing IPScom.
Dead delay timer setting.
Application 2
223
Phase Angle Check Logic
Dead Line/ Dead Bus Check Logic
Dead Line/ Dead Bus Check Input Initiate Logic
Dead Input Enable
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND AND
AND
AND
|V
1
- V
X
| < Delta V Limit
Delta V Is Enabled
Delta F Is Enabled
V1 Lower Voltage Limit >
V1 Upper Voltage Limit <
V
X
Lower Voltage Limit >
V
X
Upper Voltage Limit <
Phase Angle Phase Limit <
|F
1
- F
X
| < Delta F Limit
Phase Angle OK
AND
AND
|V
1
- V
X
| < Delta V Limit
Delta V Is Enabled
Delta F Is Enabled
|F
1
- F
X
| < Delta F Limit
With Delta V OR Delta F Enabled
With Delta V AND Delta F Enabled
V1
pos
Dead Limit <
Dead V1 Hot V
X
Enabled
V
X
> Dead Limit
Dead V
X
Hot V1 Enabled
V1
pos
Dead Limit <
V
X
< Dead Limit
V
X
< Dead Limit
Dead V1 V
X
Enabled
V1
pos
Dead Limit <
V
X
> Dead Limit
Dead V1 Hot V
X
Enabled
V1
pos
Dead Limit >
V1
pos
Dead Limit >
V
X
< Dead Limit AND
Dead V
X
Hot V1 Enabled
Selected INPUT Is Activated
AND
User Software Setting
Measured Variable
Delta V and Delta F Check Logic
Delta V and Delta F Check Logic
Only one Delta V and
Delta F Check Scheme
may be active at a time.
Only one Delta V and
Delta F Check Scheme
may be active at a time.
Sync Check Timer
Output Seal-in Timer
25S
Output
Contact
OR
Dead Check Timer
Output Seal-in Timer
25D
Output
Contact
Figure 2-17 Sync Check Logic Diagrams
224
@ : WARNING, you have not selected an output!
(25) - SYNC CHECK
Save
Dead V1 Hot VX Hot V1 Dead VX Dead V1 Dead VX
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
25D
Dead Voltage Limit:
0 V 60 V
Phase Angle Window:
Upper Voltage Limit:
Lower Voltage Limit:
Sync Check Delay:
0
o
60 V
40 V
1 Cycle
90
o
140 V
120 V
8160 Cycles
Cancel
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dead Input Enable
Blocking Inputs
6 5 4 3 2 1
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Expanded I/P Initiate
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
25S Sync Check Phase
Phase AB Phase BC
Delta Voltage:
Enable Disable
Delta Frequency: 0.001 Hz 0.500 Hz
Enable Disable
1.0 V 50.0 V
25S
Dead Time Delay:
1 Cycle 8160 Cycles
F25
X ?
Phase CA
Figure 2-18 Sync Check (25) Setpoint Ranges
Application 2
225
27 Phase Undervoltage
The Phase Undervoltage function (27) may be used
to detect any condition causing long- or short-term
undervoltage. This is a true three-phase function in
that each phase has an independent timing element.
The ranges and increments are presented in Figure
2-19.
Magnitude measurement depends on the 59/27
Magnitude Select setting. (See Section 2.1,
Configuration, Relay System Setup.) When the RMS
calculation is selected, the magnitude calculation is
accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz)
and the accuracy of the time delay is +20 cycles. If
DFT calculation is selected, the magnitude
calculation is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz, and the
timer accuracy is K1 cycle.
@ : WARNING,You have not selected an output!
(27) - PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Save Cancel
#2
#3
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
#1
Expanded I/Os
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
F27
X ?
Figure 2-19 Phase Undervoltage (27) Setpoint Ranges
27 #2 and 27 #3 Screens are identical to 27 #1. 27 #1 PICKUP
_____________ Volts
27 #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
226
27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral
For ground faults near the stator neutral, the Third
Harmonic (180/150 Hz) Neutral undervoltage
function (27TN) provides stator ground-fault
protection for high-impedance-grounded generator
applications (See Figure 2-20). When used in
conj uncti on wi th the fundamental neutral
overvoltage (60/50Hz) function (59N), 100% stator
ground-fault protection can be provided. This is
illustrated in Figure 2-20.
The 27TN function can be supervised by the
posi ti ve-sequence undervol tage el ement.
Undervoltage supervision can prevent tripping when
the generator field is not energized or the unit is
not yet synchronized.
In some generators, the third harmonic voltage
can be very low, especially during light load
conditions. It is also observed in some generator
installations that the third harmonic voltage is
considerably reduced for a specific range of power
output (band). To prevent mis-operation during
these conditions, the 27TN function can be
programmed to be supervised (blocked) by low
forward power, low reverse power, low Vars (lead
and lag), low power factor (lead/lag), and when
the forward power is inside a band.
To properly handle pump storage operations, the
M-3425A forward power blocking algorithm is enable
from zero per unit to the forward power setpoint.
During plant startup, after the field is flashed and
before the unit synchronized, small current
measurement errors cause the measured power
to fluctuate (typically <0.2%.) This may result in
a measured power value that is negative (i.e.,
0.001 pu.) If the reverse power blocking is not
enabled, the 27TN may be momentarily unblocked,
resulting in a relay operation and nuisance generator
trip. It is highly recommended that if the Forward
Power Blocking is used, both the Forward Power
Blocking and Reverse Power Blocking be enabled
and set.
In the majority of the cases, these blocking
functions will be disabled, except for those operating
cases where the third harmonic neutral voltage
magnitude is less than 0.5 V. The settings for
the blocking functions should be set based on
field measurements. Blocking regions are illustrated
in Figure 2-21.
The 27TN setting depends on the actual third-
harmonic neutral voltage level seen during normal
operation of the generator. The setting should be
about 50% of the minimum third-harmonic voltage
observed during various loading conditions. This
can be most conveniently measured during
commissioning of the relay. Since the relay
measures the third harmonic voltage levels and
will display those values directly, no additional
equipment is required. The undervoltage inhibit
setting should be about 80% to 90% of the nominal
voltage. The ranges and increments are presented
in Figure 2-22.
0-30%
Protection
provided by:
Neutral End of
Generator
N
e
u
t
r
a
l

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
0% 50%
Fault Position
(% of stator winding measured
from neutral end of generator)
100%
Terminal End
of Generator
Fundamental (60/50 Hz) neutral
voltage during ground fault
Third Harmonic (180/150 Hz) neutral
voltage during ground fault
Pre-fault third harmonic voltage level
5% - 10%
27TN Setpoint
Pre-fault fundamental neutral voltage level
59N Setpoint (typically 5V)
59N
27TN
Figure 2-20 Third Harmonic Undervoltage (27TN) Protection Characteristics
Application 2
227
-P
+P
Lag var Block
Lead var Block
Reverse
Power
Block
Forward
Power
Block
Low Band Forward
Power Block
High Band
Forward
Power Block
Block Block
+Q
-Q
Figure 2-21 27TN Blocking Regions
(27TN) - THIRD HARMONIC UNDERVOLTAGE, NEUTRAL
Pickup:
Pos. Seq. Voltage Block:
Forward Power Block:
Reverse Power Block:
Lead var Block:
Lag var Block:
Lead Power Factor Block:
Lag Power Factor Block:
Hi Band Forward Power Block:
Lo Band Forward Power Block:
Delay:
0.1 V
5 V
0.01 PU
-1.00 PU
-1.00 PU
0.01 PU
0.01 Lead
0.01 Lag
0.01 PU
0.01 PU
1 Cycle
14.00 V
180 V
1.00 PU
-0.01 PU
-0.01 PU
1.00 PU
1.00 Lead
1.00 Lag
1.00 PU
1.00 PU
8160 Cycles
#1
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
Enable Disable
Enable Disable
Enable Disable
Enable Disable
Enable Disable
Enable Disable
Enable Disable
Enable Disable
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
Expanded I/Os
#1 #2
Cancel Save
Figure 2-22 Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral Circuit (27TN) Setpoint Ranges
228
27TN #2 Screens are identical to 27TN #1.
Relay volts are equal to the primary neutral volt-
age divided by the grounding transformer ratio. Gen-
erally set for approximately 50% of the minimum
third harmonic voltage observed during various load-
ing conditions.
27TN #1 PICKUP
_____________ Volts
27TN #1 POS SEQ VOLT BLK
disable ENABLE
27TN #1 POS SEQ VOLT BLK
Volts
27TN #1 FWD POWER BLK
disable ENABLE
27TN #1 FWD POWER BLK
PU
27TH #1 REV POWER BLK
disable ENABLE
27TN #1 REV POWER BLK
PU
27TN #1 LEAD VAR BLK
disable ENABLE
27TN #1 LEAD VAR BLK
PU
27TN #1 LAG VAR BLK
disable ENABLE
27TN #1 LAG VAR BLK
PU
27TN #1 LEAD PF BLK
disable enable
27TN #1 LEAD PF BLK
LEAD
27TN #1 LAG PF BLK
disable enable
27TN #1 LAG PF BLK
LAG
27TN #1 BAND FWD PWR BLK
disable enable
27TN#1 LO B FWD PWR BLK
PU
27TN#1 HI B FWD PWR BLK
PU
27TN #1 DELAY
Cycles
Application 2
229
32 Directional Power
The Directional Power function (32) can provide
protection against both generator motoring and
overload. It provides three power setpoints, each
with a magnitude setting and a time delay. The
Forward Power direction (power flow to system) is
automatically chosen when the pickup setting is
positive and the Reverse Power direction (power
flow to generator) is automatically chosen when the
pickup setting is negative. The range, as shown is
from 3.000 PU to 3.000 PU where 1.0 PU is equal
to the generator MVA rating. Normalized PU power
flow measurements are based on Nominal Voltage
and Nominal Current setting, as shown in Section
2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup.
Protection from Generator Motoring
Protection against motoring is provided by selecting
a negative pickup with Over/Under power set to
Over. The relay will operate when the measured real
power is greater (more negative) than the pickup
setting in the reverse direction.
In some steam generator applications it is desirable
to trip the generator when the forward power is less
than a small value. This is due to the fact that the
trapped steam will cause the generator to supply a
small amount of power even though the steam
valves are closed. In this case the Over/Under
power setting is set to Under and a positive pickup
setting is chosen. The relay will trip when the
measured forward power is less than the pickup
value. The function should be blocked when the
generator breaker is open (using contact input
blocking) otherwise the function will trip and prevent
the generator from being brought online.
Protection from Generator Overload
Protection from generator overload is provided by
selecting a positive pickup setting with Over/Under
Power setting set to Over. The relay will operate
when the measured real power is greater than the
pickup setting.
Protection from Excessive Reactive Power
The directional power element #3 can be set to
operate on either real power or reactive power.
When protection from excessive reactive power is
required the element #3 can be set to operate on
reactive power. The relay will operate when the
measured reactive power exceeds the pickup setting.
Figures 2-23 through 2-26 show reverse power, low
forward power, over power, and over reactive power
applications.
TRIP
PU
Reverse
Power Flow
Pickup
1.0 PU
-1.0 PU
Forward
Power Flow
Figure 2-23 Tripping on Reverse Power Flow (Over Power with Negative Pickup)
230
32 #1 PICKUP
_______________ PU
32 #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
32 #1 TARGET LED
disable enable
32#1 UNDER/OVER POWER
over under
32 #2 PICKUP
_______________ PU
32 #2 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
32 #2 TARGET LED
disable enable
over under
32 #3 PICKUP
_______________ PU
32 #3 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
32 #3 TARGET LED
disable enable
over under
32 #3 DIR POWER SENSING
real reactive
The reverse power pickup setting should be based on the type of
prime mover and the losses when the generator is motoring.
Reverse power relays should always be applied with a time delay
in order to prevent mis-operation during power swing conditions.
Typical time delay settings are 20 to 30 seconds.
Target LED for the 32 Function elements can be individually enabled
or disabled.
When Low Forward Power protection is desired, set this to Under
with a positive pickup setting. The relay will trip when the real
power measurement is less than or equal to the pickup setpoint.
If used, positive direction power settings can be used for overload
protection, providing either alarm or tripping or both, when power
equals or exceeds the setting. The pickup and time delay settings
should be based on the capability limit of the generator.
A second reverse power setting can be used for sequential trip-
ping of the generator in which case the associated time delay will
be in the range of 2 to 3 seconds.
Directional Power Sensing for Element #3 can be selected as Real
or Reactive.
Application 2
231
TRIP
PU
Reverse
Power Flow
Pickup
1.0 PU
-1.0 PU
Forward
Power Flow
Figure 2-24 Tripping on Low Forward Power (Under Power with Positive Pickup)
TRIP
PU
Reverse
Power Flow
Pickup
1.0 PU
-1.0 PU
Forward
Power Flow
Figure 2-25 Tripping on Overpower (Over Power with Positive Pickup)
232
TRIP
PU
Reverse
Power Flow
Pickup
1.0 PU
-1.0 PU
Forward
Power Flow
Reactive Power
Into System
Reactive Power
Into Generator
Figure 2-26 Tripping on Over Reactive Power with Element #3 (Over Power, Positive Pickup and
Directional Power Sensing Set to Reactive)
(32) - DIRECTIONAL POWER
Expanded I/Os
#1
Overpower Underpower Target LED Enable
Pickup:
Delay:
-3.000 PU
1 Cycle
3.000 PU
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Save Cancel
F32
X ?
Expanded I/Os
#2
Pickup:
Delay:
-3.000 PU
1 Cycle
3.000 PU
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Expanded I/Os
#3
Pickup:
Delay:
-3.000 PU
1 Cycle
3.000 PU
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Real Reactive Directional Power Sensing:
Figure 2-27 Directional Power, 3-Phase (32) Setpoint Ranges
Application 2
233
40 Loss of Field
The Loss-of-Field function (40) provides protection
for a partial or complete loss of field. A variety of
possible settings make the M-3425A Generator
Protection Relay very flexible when applied to loss-
of-field protection. Ranges and increments are
presented in Figure 2-30.
The loss-of-field function is implemented with two
offset mho elements, an undervoltage element, and
a directional element. The setting for each mho
element, diameter, offset, and time delay, are
adjusted individually. Each element has two time
delay settings. The second time delay (delay with
VC) is applicable with voltage control, and the timer
only starts if the positive sequence voltage is below
the voltage control setting. The function with voltage
control and without voltage control can be
programmed to send to two different output contacts,
if desired. The delay with voltage control may be
enabled on each element but the voltage level
setting is common. The voltage control allows for
faster tripping when low voltage may be caused by
the VAr intake by the machine with loss of excitation.
A common directional unit is provided to block the
relay operation during slightly underexcited
conditions (since approach #1 with negative offset
is inherently directional, the directional element is
not required). The directional units angle setting
(Q
D
) can be set from 0 to 20.
The settings of the offset mho elements should be
such that the relay detects the loss-of-field condition
for any loading while not mis-operating during power
swings and fault conditions. Two approaches are
widely used in the industry, both of which are
supported by the M-3425A relay. Both approaches
require knowledge of the reactances and other
parameters of the generator. They are described in
Figure 2-28, Loss of Field (40) Protective
Approach I and Figure 2-29, Loss of Field (40)
Protective Approach II.
Positive sequence impedance measurements are
used for the loss of field functions. All impedance
settings are secondary relay quantities and can be
derived from the following formula:
Z
SEC
= Z
PRI
x (R
C
R
V
)
where Z
SEC
= secondary reflected impedance, Z
PRI
=
primary impedance, R
C
= current transformer ratio,
and R
V
= voltage transformer ratio.
The first approach is shown in Figure 2-28, Loss of
Field (40) Protective Approach I. Here, both of
the offset mho elements (#1 and #2) are set with an
offset of X
l
d
2, where X
l
d
is the (unsaturated)
direct axis transient reactance of the generator. The
diameter of the smaller circle (#1) is set at 1.0 pu
impedance on the machine base. This mho element
detects loss-of-field from full load to about 30%
load. A small time delay provides fast protection.
The diameter of the larger circle (#2) is set equal to
X
d
, where X
d
is the (unsaturated) direct axis
synchronous reactance of the machine. This mho
element can detect a loss-of-field condition from
almost no load to full load. A time delay of 30 to 60
cycles (#2) should be used in order to prevent
possible incorrect operation on stable swings.
The time delay with voltage control is typically set
shorter than the other time delay.
The second approach is shown in Figure 2-29,
Loss of Field (40) Protective Approach II. In this
approach, one of the mho elements is set with an
offset of X
l
d
2, a diameter of 1.1 X
d
-(X
l
d
2), and
a time delay of 10 to 30 cycles. The second element
is set to coordinate with the generator minimum
excitation limit and steady-state stability limit.
In order to obtain proper coordination, the offset of
this element must be adjusted to be positive.
Typically, the offset is set equal to the unit
transformer reactance (X
T
). The diameter is
approximately equal to (1.1 X
d
+ X
T
). A time delay
of 30 to 60 cycles would prevent mis-operation on
stable swings.
The following table provides suggested time settings
when time delay with VC is used in addition to
standard time delay.
Typical setting is 13 (0.974 power factor). This
setting is common to both element #1 and #2.
Approach #1 can also be used for Zone #1, and
approach #2 for Zone #2, where better coordination
with AVR limiters, machine capability limits, and
steady state stability limits can be obtained.
234
40 #1 DIAMETER
Ohms
40 #1 OFFSET
Ohms
40 #1 DELAY
Cycles
40VC #1 DELAY WITH VC
Cycles
40 #2 DIAMETER
Ohms
40 #2 OFFSET
Ohms
40 #2 DELAY
Cycles
40VC #2 DELAY WITH VC
Cycles
40 VOLTAGE CONTROL
Volts
40 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT
Degrees
Zone 1
Voltage Control
Setting
Delay
Delay with VC
N/A
15 Cycles
Disable
Zone 2
80 to 90% of
Nominal Voltage
3,600 Cycles
60 Cycles
Table 2-3 Voltage Control Time Settings
Application 2
235
+X
R +R
X
Underexcited
1.1 X
d
X'
d
2
Q
D
X
T
Minimum Exciter Limit
Machine Capability
Steady-State Stability Limit
Directional Element
Heavy Load
Light Load
Loss of Excitation
Final Impedance
Locus
Block Direction
Trip Direction
Directional
Element Angle
Setting
Figure 2-29 Loss of Field (40)Protective Approach 2
+X
R +R
X
d
X
Underexcited
Heavy Load
Light Load
1.0 pu
X'
d
2
Q
D
Minimum Exciter Limit
Machine Capability
Steady-State Stability Limit
Loss of Excitation
Final Impedance
Locus
Figure 2-28 Loss of Field (40)Protective Approach 1
236
(40) - LOSS OF FIELD
#2
#1
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Delay:
0.1 Ohm
- 50.0 Ohms
1 Cycle
100.0 Ohms
50.0 Ohms
8160 Cycles
0.1 Ohm
- 50.0 Ohms
1 Cycle
100.0 Ohms
50.0 Ohms
8160 Cycles
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Delay:
5 V
Voltage Control: 180 V
0 Directional Element: 20
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
VC OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
VC Blocking Inputs @
VC OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
VC Blocking Inputs @
1 Cycle Delay with VC: 8160 Cycles
VC#2
VC#1
1 Cycle Delay with VC: 8160 Cycles
Save Cancel
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
F40
Figure 2-30 Loss-of-Field (40) Setpoint Ranges
NOTE: Out of Step Block Enable is not available for this release, and will appear greyed-out in display.
Application 2
237
46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent
The Negative Sequence Overcurrent function (46)
provi des protecti on agai nst possi bl e rotor
overheating and damage due to unbalanced faults
or other system conditions which can cause
unbalanced three phase currents in the generator.
Ranges and increments are presented in Figure
2-32.
This function has a definite time element and an
inverse time element. The definite time pickup value
and definite operating time are normally associated
with an alarm function. The inverse time element is
usually associated with a trip function and has a
pickup and an operating time defined by an (I
2
)
2
t =
K, where K is the Time Dial Setting and I
2
is the per
unit negative sequence current.
The minimum delay for the inverse time function is
factory set at 12 cycles to avoid nuisance tripping.
A maximum time to trip can be set to reduce the
operating times for modest imbalances. An important
feature that helps protect the generator from damage
due to recurring imbalances is a linear reset
characteristic. When I
2
decreases below the pickup
value, the trip timer takes the reset time setting
from its 100% trip level. Figure 2-31, Negative
Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves,
illustrates the inverse time characteristic of the
negative sequence overcurrent function.
Operating times are lower than shown in Figure 2-31
when measured current values are greater than 15
A (3 A for 1 A rated circuit).
The first task of setting this function is to determine
the capabilities of the associated machine. As
established by ANSI standards, the machine limits
are expressed as (I
2
)
2
t = K. The value of K is
established by the machine design and is generally
provided on test sheets of the machine. The relay
can accommodate any generator size because of
the wide range of K settings from 1 to 95. Typical
values can be found in ANSI C50.13-1977.
The negative sequence pickup range is from 3% to
100% of the Nominal Current value input during
system setup (see Section 2.1, Configuration).
This protection must not operate for system faults
that will be cleared by system relaying. This requires
consideration of line protection, bus differential and
breaker failure backup protections.
The pickup setting is usually quite low (35%) and the output of
this function is usually connected to alarm only.
Time delay should be set high enough to avoid alarms on tran-
sients.
The 46 Inverse Time pickup setting should coincide with the
continuous negative sequence current capability of the generator
operating at full output.
The maximum trip time is used to reduce the longer trip times
associated with low to moderate imbalances to a preset time.
Emulates generator cool down time.
The time dial setting corresponds to the K provided by the generator
manufacturer for the specific unit being protected. See Figure 2-31
for the negative sequence overcurrent inverse time curves.
46DT PICKUP
_______________ %
46DT DELAY
_____________ Cycles
46IT PICKUP
_______________ %
46IT MAX DELAY
_____________ Cycles
46IT RESET TIME
____________ Seconds
46IT TIME DIAL
________________
238
Negative Sequence Current (% of Nominal Value)
T
i
m
e

(
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
)
Pickup Setting Range
1000
800
600
400
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
8
6
4
2
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
4 5 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1000 2000 3000 4000
K
95
To 65,500 cycles
50
25
10
5
2
1
Definite Maximum
Time Setting Range
I
2
2
t=K
Definite
Minimum
Time
*
NOTE: When the phase current exceeds 3X I nominal, the operating times will be greater than those
shown.
* 0.24 seconds for 50 Hz units.
Figure 2-31 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves
(46) - NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT
Pickup:
Time Dial:
Maximum Time:
Reset Time:
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Save Cancel
X ?
Def. Time
Inv. Time
Pickup:
Delay:
3%
1 Cycle
100%
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
3%
1
600 Cycles
1 Second
100%
95
65500 Cycles
600 Seconds
F46
Figure 2-32 Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46) Setpoint Ranges
Application 2
239
49 Stator Overload Protection
The Stator Thermal Overload function (49) provides
protection against possible damage during overload
conditions. The characteristic curves are based on
IEC-255-8 standard, and represent both cold and
hot curves. The function uses the thermal time
constant of the generator and stator maximum
allowable continuous overload current (I
max
) in
implementing the inverse time characteristic.
( )
t = t x In
I
L
2
w I
PL
2
I
L
2
w I
max
2
Where: t = time to trip
= thermal time constant
I
L
= load current
I
PL
= pre-load current
I
max
= maximum allowed continuous overload current
Selects the time constant,
Selects the maximum allowed continuous overload current.
49#2 Screens are identical to those for 49#1.
Example: If we consider that the generator was
loaded with 80% of its rating power prior to overload,
then the current goes up to 2.0 times the maximum
current ((I
L
/I
max
)=2.0). Selecting the curve P=0.8
(see Figure 2-28), we have t/ =0.1133. If =30
minutes, then the time delay for this condition
would be: t = 0.1133 x 30 = 3.3999 minutes.
The 49 function has two elements, one of which can
be used for trip and the other for alarm.
t
Current-Square
t
Tripped Not Tripped
I
max
2
I
L
2
I
L
2
I
L
2
I
2
PL
I
2
PL
Figure 2-33 Time Constant, Function 49
49 #1 TIME CONSTANT
Min
49#1 MAX OVERLOAD CURR
Amps
240
49 - Overload Curves
0.001
0.01
0.1
1
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
t

/

t
P=0.0
P=0.5
P=0.6
P=0.7
P=0.8
P=0.9
P=0.99
where: P=
I
PL
I
max
I
L
/I
max
Figure 2-34 49 Function Overload Curves
Application 2
241
(49) - STATOR OVERLOAD
Time Constant:
Max. Overload Current:
1.0 min
1.00 A
999.9 min
10.00 A
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
Save Cancel
Expanded I/Os
X ?
Time Constant:
Max. Overload Current:
1.0 min
1.00 A
999.9 min
10.00 A
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
#1
Expanded I/Os
#2
F49
Figure 2-35 Stator Thermal Protection (49) Setpoint Ranges
242
50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Phase and
Neutral Circuits
The Instantaneous Phase (50) and Instantaneous
Neutral (50N) overcurrent functions provide fast
tripping for high fault currents. The settings of both
functions must be set such that they will not pickup
for fault or conditions outside the immediate
protective zone. If the neutral current input is
connected to a step-up transformers neutral CT,
the 50N function can be used as a breaker flashover
protection when used in conjunction with external
breaker failure protection. Ranges and Increments
are presented in Figures 2-36 and 2-37. The function
automatically selects fundamental RMS or total
RMS calculation based on the input frequency.
When the generator frequency is within 5 Hz from
the nominal frequency, it uses fundamental RMS
calculation. Outside of this range, it uses total RMS
calculation, which will provide protection during
offline down to a frequency of 8 Hz.
For providing off-line protection, one of the elements
can be supervised by a breaker b contact, and the
element blocked when the breaker is closed. This
allows the function to be set sensitively (below full
load current).
The relay current (I
R
) is equal to the primary current (I
p
) divided
by the appropriate CT ratio. These screens are repeated for 50#2
element.
50#1 PICKUP
Amps
50#1 DELAY
Cycles
50N PICKUP
Amps
50N DELAY
Cycles
Application 2
243
(50) - INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
0.1 A
1 Cycle
240.0 A
8160 Cycles
#2
#1
Save Cancel
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
Pickup:
Delay:
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
0.1 A
1 Cycle
240.0 A
8160 Cycles
F50
X ?
Figure 2-36 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50) Setpoint Ranges
Pickup:
Delay:
0.1 A
1 Cycle
240.0 A
8160 Cycles
(50N) - INSTANTANEOUS NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
#1
F50N
Figure 2-37 Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50N) Setpoint Ranges
244
Implementation of the generator breaker failure
function is illustrated in Figure 2-38. The breaker
failure timer will be started whenever any one of the
designated output contacts or the external
programmed breaker failure initiate status input are
operated. The timer continues to time if any one of
the phase currents are above the 50BF-Ph pickup
setting or if the 52b contact indicates the breaker is
still closed; otherwise, the timer is reset.
Since current in the generator high side CT which
energizes the 50BF protection (I
A
, I
B
, I
C
) might not
extinguish concurrently with the breaker opening for
faults between the CT location and the generator
breaker, a possible area of mis-operation exists.
Usually the risk of faults in this limited area is small
enough to be ignored but should be considered.
50BF-Neutral Element: This instantaneous
overcurrent relay is energized from the generator
neutral CT (See Figure 2-5, One-Line Functional
Diagram). This function is internally in series with a
breaker b contact (IN1) to provide logic for the
breaker flashover protection (see Figure 2-38).
HV Breaker Failure (limited) The breaker failure
function may be used for a unit breaker rather than
a generator breaker. It is limited in that it has no
fault detector associated with the unit breaker. Output
contact operation would occur if any of the initiate
contacts close and the 52b contact indicated a
closed breaker after the set time delay.
This operation is chosen by disabling the neutral
element, disabling the phase element, and
designating initiating inputs and outputs and a time
delay setting.
50BF Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker
Flashover
The Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Flashover
function (50BF) is applicable when a generator
breaker is present and line side generator CTs are
being used. The 50BF-Ph phase detector element
(if enabled) is used for breaker failure and the
50BF-N (if enabled) provides breaker flashover
protection by providing an additional breaker failure
initiate which is only active when the breaker is
open. For high impedance grounded applications,
the 50BF-N function is inapplicable and must be
disabled. Ranges and increments are presented in
Figure 2-39.
50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure: When the
M-3425A Generator Protection Relay detects an
internal fault or an abnormal operating condition, it
closes an output contact to trip the generator breaker
or the unit HV breaker. When a generator breaker is
used, protection is available for the instance where
it fails to clear the fault or abnormal condition. Such
generator breaker failure protection output contacts
must be connected to trip the additional necessary
breakers to isolate the generator from the system.
The breaker-failure condition is usually detected by
the continued presence of current in any one or
more of the phases after a trip has been sent to the
breaker. However, the current detector (50BF-Ph)
may not always give the correct status of the
breaker, especially for generator breakers. This is
because faults and abnormal operating conditions
such as ground faults, overexcitation, over/under
frequency, and reverse power may not produce
enough current to operate the current detectors. For
this reason, the breaker status input 52b contact
must be used, in addition to the 50BF-Ph, to provide
adequate breaker status indication.
Phase Initiate Enable
IN1 (52b)
Logic high when breaker closed
AND
NOT
OR
50BF-Ph
Overcurrent
I>P.U.
Output Initiate
Input Initiate
OR
50BF-N
Overcurrent
I>P.U.
Neutral Initiate Enable
AND
DELAY
TIME
Programmed
Output
Contacts
AND
Logic high
when breaker open
Figure 2-38 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram
Application 2
245
50BF PHASE ELEMENT
disable enable
50BF PICKUP PHASE
Amps
50BF NEUTRAL ELEMENT
disable enable
50BF PICKUP NEUTRAL
Amps
50BF INPUT INITIATE
i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
50BF OUTPUT INITIATE
o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1
50BF DELAY
Cycles
If generator breaker failure function is used in this application,
ENABLE here.
Set phase pickup amps.
If the breaker flashover protection is to be used with the generator
breaker failure function of the relay, set ENABLE (enable phase
element also for this application.)
Set the neutral pickup amps.
Designate the status inputs which will initiate the breaker failure
timer. Inputs IN7IN14 must be set using IPScom
.
Designate the outputs that will initiate the breaker failure timer.
Outputs OUT9OUT23 must be set using IPScom.
For generator breaker failure protection, the time delay should be
set to allow for breaker operating time plus margin.
(50BF) - BREAKER FAILURE
50BF
0.10 A Phase Current: 10.00 A
Enable Disable
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Expanded I/O Initiate
0.10 A Neutral Current: 10.00 A
Enable Disable
Delay:
1 Cycle 8160 Cycles
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
Input Initiate Output Initiate
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
F50BF
Figure 2-39 Breaker Failure (50BF) Setpoint Ranges
246
NOTE: When 50DT function is used for split-
phase differential, 50BF, 87 and 87GD
functions must be disabled.
Refer to Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay System
Setup for a description of the 50DT Split-Phase
Operate setting, and Section 2.2, System Diagrams.
In some cases, the generators may be run with a
faulted turn shorted until the generator winding is
repaired. To prevent mis-operation under these
conditions, the pickup setting of the faulted phase
should be set higher than the other phases. To
accommodate this function, individual pickup
settings are available for each phase. Ranges and
increments are presented in Figure 2-40
50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase
differential)
The Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) function can
be applied in two different configurations based on
the CT connections. When CT configuration shown
in Figure 2-5, One Line Functional Diagram is used,
the 50DT function is used as a definite time phase
overcurrent function to provide protection for external
and internal faults in the generator. When the CTs
are connected to measure the split phase differential
current (shown in Figure 2-6, Alternative One Line
Functional Diagram), the 50DT function can be
used as a split-phase differential relay.
(50DT) - DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT
#1
#2
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Expanded I/Os
Pickup (A):
Pickup (B):
Pickup (C):
Delay:
0.20 A
0.20 A
0.20 A
1 Cycle
240.0 A
240.0 A
240.0 A
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup (A):
Pickup (B):
Pickup (C):
Delay:
0.20 A
0.20 A
0.20 A
1 Cycle
240.0 A
240.0 A
240.0 A
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
F50DT
Figure 2-40 Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) Setpoint Ranges
50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE A
______________ Amps
50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE B
______________ Amps
50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE C
______________ Amps
50DT #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
50DT #2 screens are identical to 50DT #1.
Application 2
247
50/27 Inadvertent Energizing
The Inadvertent Energizing function (50/27) of the
relay is an overcurrent function supervised by
generator terminal bus voltage. Inadvertent or
accidental energizing of off-line generators has
occurred frequently enough to warrant the use of
dedicated protection logic to detect this condition.
Operating errors, breaker flashovers, control circuit
malfunctions or a combination of these causes
have resulted in generators being accidentally
energized while off-line. The problem is particularly
prevalent on large generators connected through a
high voltage disconnect switch to either a ring bus
or breaker-and-a-half bus configuration. When a
generator is accidentally energized from the power
system, it will accelerate like an induction motor.
Typical pickup setting is 0.5 amps. No coordination is required with
other protection since this function is only operational when the
generator is off-line.
The purpose of the undervoltage detector is to determine whether
the unit is connected to the system. The voltage level during this
accidental energization depends on the system strength. Typical
setting is 50%70% of rated voltage (in some cases, it may be set
as low as 20%.)
The pickup time delay is the time for the undervoltage unit to
operate to arm the protection. It must coordinate with other protection
for conditions which cause low voltages (typically longer than 21
and 51V time delay settings.)
The dropout time delay is the time for the unit to operate to disarm
the protection when the voltage is increased above the pickup
value or the generator is brought on-line.
50/27 PICKUP
______________ Amps
50/27 VOLTAGE CONTROL
_____________ Volts
50/27 PICKUP DELAY
_____________ Cycles
50/27 DROPOUT DELAY
_____________ Cycles
While the machine is accelerating, high currents
induced into the rotor can cause significant damage
in a matter of seconds. Voltage supervised
overcurrent logic is designed to provide this
protection. (See Figure 2-41, Inadvertent Energizing
Function Logic Diagram)
An undervoltage element (all three phase voltages
must be below pickup) with adjustable pickup and
dropout time delay supervises instantaneous
overcurrent tripping. The undervoltage detectors
automatically arm the overcurrent tripping when the
generator is taken off-line. This undervoltage detector
will disable or disarm the overcurrent operation
when the machine is put back in service. Ranges
and increments are presented in Figure 2-42.
248
* On All Three Phases Simultaneously
Programmed
Output
Contacts
AND
Pickup
Delay
Dropout
Delay
27
Undervoltage*
V<PU
50
Overcurrent
I>PU
Timer
Figure 2-41 Inadvertent Energizing Function Logic Diagram
(50/27) - INADVERTENT ENERGIZING
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
50/27
Pickup:
Pickup:
Pick-up Delay:
Drop-out Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
1 Cycle
130 V
8160 Cycles
8160 Cycles
(50) - OVERCURRENT
0.50 A 15.00 A
(27) - UNDERVOLTAGE
Expanded I/Os
X ?
Save Cancel
F50/27
Figure 2-42 Inadvertent Energizing (50/27) Setpoint Ranges
Application 2
249
51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent
The Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent function (51N)
provides protection against ground faults. Since no
zero sequence or ground current is usually present
during normal operation, this function can be set for
greater sensitivity than the phase overcurrent
protection. If the 51N and 50N functions are not
used at the generator neutral, they can be used to
detect system ground faults by being energized by
the step-up transformer neutral CTs. Ranges and
The curves available for use are shown in Appendix
D, Inverse Time Curves. They cover a range from
1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. An additional one
(51N) - INVERSE TIME NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT
Expanded I/Os
X ?
Save Cancel
#1
Pickup:
Time Dial:
0.25 A
0.5
12.00 A
11.0
Curves
Beco Definite Time
IECI
IEEE Moderately Inverse
Beco Inverse
IECVI
IEEE Very Inverse
Beco Very Inverse
IECEI
IEEE Extremely Inverse
Beco Extremely Inverse
IECLTI
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
F51N
Figure 2-43 Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51N) Setpoint Ranges
The relay current (I
R
) is equal to the primary current (I
P
) divided by
the appropriate CT ratio. I
R
= I
P
CT ratio
Select one of the time curves shown in Appendix D, Inverse Time
Curves. The appropriate curve in the selected family is designated
here.
Appropriate Time Dial for coordination with downstream relay
protection chosen from the time curve above.
51N PICKUP
______________ Amps
51N CURVE
bedef beinv bevinv
51N TIME DIAL
________________
cycle time delay should be added to these curves in
order to obtain the relay operating time. Inverse
time curves saturate beyond 20 times pickup. For
currents in excess of 20 times pickup, operating
times are fixed at the 20 times pickup level.
The function automatically selects fundamental RMS
or total RMS calculation based on the input
frequency. When the generator frequency is within
5 Hz from the nominal frequency, it uses
fundamental RMS calculation. Outside of this range,
it uses total RMS calculation, which will provide
protection during offline down to a frequency of 8
Hz.
250
The inverse time overcurrent function can be voltage
controlled (VC), voltage restrained (VR), or neither.
For voltage-controlled operation, the function is not
active unless the voltage is below the voltage control
setpoint. This philosophy is used to confirm that the
overcurrent is due to system fault. When applied,
most users will set voltage control limits in the
range of 0.7 to 0.9 per unit RMS voltage. When
voltage restraint is selected (See Figure 2-44,
Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic), the pickup
setting is continuously modified in proportion to the
collapsing terminal voltage. The voltage restraint
function is well-suited to small generators with
relatively short time constants.
NOTE: The 51V function should be blocked by
fuse loss if in the voltage control mode
only. Fuse loss blocking is not desirable
for voltage restraint mode because the
pickup is automatically held at 100%
pickup during fuse loss conditions, and
operation will continue as normal.
The internally derived voltage used to realize the
voltage control or restraint feature depends on the
configured VT configuration and the Delta-Y
Transform setting (see Section 2.1, Configuration,
Relay System Setup). Table 2-4, Delta/Wye
Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs describes the
calculation for the various system VT configurations.
Voltage Control/Restraint
Time-overcurrent relays, one per phase, are used to
trip circuits selectively and to time-coordinate with
other up- or downstream relays. For this function,
eight complete series of inverse time tripping
characteristics are included. The same descriptions
and nomenclature which are traditionally used with
electromechanical relays are used in the relay. Thus,
user may choose from four BECO curves (BEDEF,
BEINV, BEVINV, and BEEINV), four IEC curves
(IECI, IECVI, IECEI, and IECLT), and three IEEE
curves (MINV, VINV, EINV.) Within each family, the
operator selects time dial setting and pickup (tap)
setting, just as with electromechanical relays. Ranges
and increments are presented in Figure 2-45.
The curves available for use are shown in Appendix
D, Inverse Time Curves. They cover a range from
1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. An additional one
cycle time delay should be added to these curves in
order to obtain the relay operating time. Inverse
time curves saturate beyond 20 times pickup. For
currents in excess of 20 times pickup, operating
times are fixed at the 20 time pickup level. The
particular settings will be made by information from
short-circuit fault studies and knowledge of the
coordination requirements with other devices in the
system that respond to time overcurrent.
51V is a true three-phase function, in that the relay
incorporates separate integrating timers on each
phase.
The pickup of the 51V is set in relay amps.
(Relay amps = primary amps CT ratio)
Selects one of the time curves as shown in Appendix D, Inverse
Time Curves. The appropriate curve in the selected family of
curves is designated here.
Disable if neither voltage control nor voltage restraint is desired. If
voltage restraint is designated, the tap setting is modified as
shown in Figure 2-43. If voltage control is designated, the 51V will
only operate when the voltage is less than the 51V voltage control
setting specified below. When applied, the voltage control is usually
set in the range of 70% to 90% of the nominal voltage.
51V PICKUP
Amps
51V CURVE
bedef beinv bevinv
51V TIME DIAL
________________
51V VOLTAGE CONTROL
disable V_CNTL v_rstrnt
51V VOLTAGE CONTROL
Volts
Application 2
251
50
25 50 75 100
75
25
Input Voltage (% of rated voltage)
0
100
Tap Setting as %
of Tap Setting at
Rated Voltage
Figure 2-44 Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic
Generator Directly Connected
Generator Connected Through
Delta AB/Wye or Delta AC/Wye Transformer
Current
Voltage Control or Restraint
Current
Voltage Control or Restraint
L-G L-L or L-G to L-L L-G L-L or L-G to L-L
I
a
(V
A
V
C
)/S3 V
AB
I
a
V
A
(V
AB
V
CA
)/S3
I
b
(V
B
V
A
)/S3 V
BC
I
b
V
B
(V
BC
V
AB
)/S3
I
c
(V
C
V
B
)/S3 V
CA
I
c
V
C
(V
CA
V
BC
)/S3
Table 2-4 Delta/Wye Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs
(51V) - INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT WITH VOLTAGE CONTROL OR VOLTAGE RESTRAINT
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
0.50 A
0.5
12.00 A
11.0
Pickup:
Time Dial:
#1
Expanded I/Os
X ?
Save Cancel
F51V
Curves
Beco Definite Time
IECI
IEEE Moderately Inverse
Beco Inverse
IECVI
IEEE Very Inverse
Beco Very Inverse
IECEI
IEEE Extremely Inverse
Beco Extremely Inverse
IECLTI
Voltage Control: 5 V 180 V
Disable Voltage Control Voltage Restraint
Figure 2-45 Inverse Time Overcurrent with Voltage
Control/Voltage Restraint (51VC/VR) Setpoint Ranges
252
59 Phase Overvoltage
The Phase Overvoltage function (59) may be used
to provide overvoltage protection for the generator.
The relay provides overvoltage protection functions
with three voltage levels and three definite-time
setpoints, any one or more of which can be
programmed to trip the unit or send an alarm. This
is a true 3-phase function in that each phase has an
independent timing element.
The 59 function can be programmed to use phase
voltage (any one of the three phases) or positive
sequence voltage as input.
Magnitude measurement depends on the 59/27
Magnitude Select setting (See Section 2.1,
Configuration, Relay System Setup). When the RMS
option is selected, the magnitude calculation is
accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz)
and the accuracy of the time delay is +20 cycles. If
DFT option is selected, the magnitude calculation
is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz, and the timer accuracy
is K1 cycle. When the input voltage select is set to
positive sequence voltage, the 59 functions uses
DFT to measure the positive sequence voltage,
irrespective of DFT/RMS selection. Ranges and
@ : WARNING, Function DISABLED until output selected!
(59) - PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
#3
#1
#2
Input Voltage Select: Phase Voltage Positive Sequence Voltage
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Expanded I/Os
X ?
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
F59
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
Save Cancel
Figure 2-46 Phase Overvoltage (59) Setpoint Ranges
Generator capability is generally 105% of rated voltage.
59 #2 and 59 #3 screens are identical to 59 #1.
59 #1 INPUT VOLTAGE SEL.
phase_volt pos_seq_volt
59 #1 PICKUP
_____________ Volts
59 #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
Application 2
253
59D Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (Ratio)
This scheme, when used in conjunction with 59N
function may provide 100% Stator Ground fault
protection.
Figure 2-47 illustrates a third harmonic voltage
differential scheme. This scheme compares the
third harmonic voltage appearing at the neutral to
that which appears at the generator terminals. The
ratio of these third harmonic voltages is relatively
constant for all load conditions. A stator phase-to-
ground fault will disrupt this balance, causing
operation of the differential relay (see Figure 2-20).
The generator terminal voltage (Line Side Voltage)
can be selected as 3V
0
(Calculated by the relay
from V
A
, V
B
and V
C
) or V
X
(broken delta VT input
connected at the V
X
input.) Positive sequence
undervoltage blocking will prevent the function from
misoperating when the generator is offline (the
terminal voltage is below the set value).
59D RATIO
________________
The ratio (or third harmonic) voltage measured at the generator
terminals to the third harmonic voltage measured at neutral.
The 59D Ratio Pickup Setting can be calculated using field
measurement of Third Harmonic Voltages as follows:
This setting is typically enabled.
Where:
is the minimum measured Ratio of the Third Harmonic Voltages at
various loading conditions of the generator.
Selection of V
X
will give better accuracy and sensitivity than 3V
0
. If
3V
0
is selected, VT configuration must be set to Line-Ground. If the
nominal third harmonic voltage is <1 V, 3V
0
line side voltage
selection is not recommended, because noise in the 3V
0
and V
N
can cause 59D misoperation.
59D POS SEQ VOLT BLK
disable ENABLE
59D POS SEQ VOLT BLK
_____________ Volts
59D DELAY
_____________ Cycles
59D Ratio Pickup
V
3XM
V
3NM
3V
OM
V
3NM
OR
( ( ) )
= 1.5 x
59D LINE SIDE VOLTAGE
3v0 VX
V
3XM
V
3NM
3V
OM
V
3NM
OR
( ( ) )
254
V
3N
V
3X
M-3425A
(59D) - THIRD HARMONIC VOLTAGE DIFFERENTIAL
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
#1
180 V
Ratio (VX/VN):
Delay:
0.1
1 Cycle
5.0
8160 Cycles
5 V
Line Side Voltage: 3V0 VX
Enable Disable
Pos Seq Voltage Block:
Expanded I/Os
X ?
Save Cancel
F59D
Figure 2-48 Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (59D) Setpoint Ranges
The ratio
V
3X
V
3N
3
Vo
V
3N
Pickup OR
>
( ( ) )
Where: V
3x
is the Third Harmonic Triple Zero Sequence voltage measured at the generator
terminals.
V
3N
is the Third Harmonic voltage measure at the neutral.
Figure 2-47 Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (Ratio) Scheme
for Generator Ground Fault Protection
Application 2
255
59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero
Sequence
The Neutral Overvoltage function (59N) provides
stator ground fault protection for high impedance
grounded generators. The 59N function can provide
ground fault protection for 9095% of the stator
winding (measured from the terminal end).
(59N) - NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup:
Delay:
5.0 V
1 Cycle
180.0 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
5.0 V
1 Cycle
180.0 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
#3
Expanded I/Os
#2
Expanded I/Os
Pickup:
Delay:
5.0 V
1 Cycle
180.0 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
#1
X ?
59N
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
20 Hz Injection Mode: o Enable o Disable
Figure 2-49 Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (59N) Setpoint Ranges
59N #1 PICKUP
Volts
59N #1 DELAY
Cycles
59N 20HZ INJECTION MODE
disable ENABLE
59N #2 and 59N #3 screens
are identical to 59N #1.
With typical grounding transformer ratios and a typical minimum setting of
5 volts, this protection is capable of detecting ground faults in about 95% of
the generator stator winding from the terminal end.
If grounded-wye/grounded-wye VTs are connected at the machine terminals,
the voltage relay must be time coordinated with VT fuses for faults on the
transformer secondary winding. If relay time delay for coordination is not
acceptable, the coordination problem can be alleviated by grounding one of the
secondary phase conductors instead of the secondary neutral. When this
technique is used, the coordination problem still exists for ground faults on the
secondary neutral conductor. Thus, its usefulness is limited to those applications
where the exposure to ground faults on the secondary neutral is small.
Since system ground faults can induce zero sequence voltages at the
generator due to transformer capacitance coupling, this relay must
coordinate with the system ground fault relaying. It is possible to set
59N#1, 59N#2, and 59N#3 to coordinate with the PT secondary fuses, and
also coordinate with worst case capacitive coupling interference voltage
from system ground faults (high side of the GSU).
For applications where the M-3425A relay (where the 64S function is
purchased or not) is used with 100% Stator Ground protection with 20 Hz
injection schemes, the 59N 20 Hz injection mode must be enabled in order
to calculate the voltage magnitude accurately for the 59N function, due to
the 20 Hz injection voltage. The time delay accuracy of the function is 1 to
+5 cycles when the 20 Hz injection mode is enabled.
The 59N function provides three setpoints, and
responds only to the fundamental frequency
component, rejecting all other harmonic components.
Ranges and increments are presented in Figure 2-50.
256
59X Multipurpose Overvoltage (Turn-to-Turn
Stator Fault Protection or Bus Ground
Protection)
For generators where the stator-winding configuration
does not allow the application of split-phase
differential, a neutral voltage method can be used to
detect turn-to-turn stator winding faults. Figure 2-50
illustrates this method. Three VTs are connected in
wye and the primary ground lead is tied to the
generator neutral. The secondary is connected in a
broken delta with an overvoltage relay connected
across its open delta to measure 3V
0
voltage. In
High Impedance grounded generators, connecting
the primary ground lead to the generator neutral,
makes this element insensitive to stator ground
faults. The relay will, however, operate for turn-to-
turn faults, which increase the 3V
0
voltage above
low normal levels. Installation requires the cable
from the neutral of the VT to generator neutral be
insulated for the system line-to-ground voltage and
the relay to be tuned to fundamental (60/50 Hz)
frequency components of the voltage since some
third-harmonic frequency component of the voltage
will be present across the broken delta VT input.
Alternatively, this function can be used to detect
bus ground faults, when connected as shown in
Figure 2-10.
When used for Turn-to-Turn fault protection the pickup should be
set above the normal zero sequence voltage level. Typically the
pickup is set to 5 V.
When used for Bus Ground protection it is again set above the
normal zero sequence voltage seen at the bus. Typical setting is
between 10 and 20 Volts to provide sensitive protection.
The Time Delay for Turn-to-Turn faults should be set to approximately
5 cycles. For bus ground fault protection application the time delay
should coordinate with other ground fault relaying and VT fuses.
59X #2 screens are identical to 59X #1.
59X #1 PICKUP
_____________ Volts
59X #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
Application 2
257
59X
R
3V
0
VT
R
GENERATOR
See Note Below
NOTE: Installation requires the cable from the neutral of the VT to generator neutral be insulated for the
system line-to-ground voltage.
Figure 2-50 Turn-to-Turn Stator Winding Fault Protection
(59X) - MULTIPURPOSE OVERVOLTAGE
#2
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
#1
Pickup:
Delay:
5 V
1 Cycle
180 V
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Expanded I/Os
X ?
Save Cancel
Expanded I/Os
F59X
Figure 2-51 (59X) Multi-purpose Overvoltage Setpoint Ranges
258
A frequency check element is included in the fuse
loss detection logic to avoid erroneous alarms when
the generator is in a start up condition. For a 50Hz
system, the 60FL alarm will be inhibited if the
measured frequency is greater than 55.12 Hz F
U
or
less than 44.88 Hz F
L
. For a 60 Hz system, the 60FL
alarm will be inhibited if the measured frequency is
greater than 65.12 Hz F
U
or less than 54.88 Hz F
L
.
External Fuse-Loss Function
For the specific application where the preceding
logic cannot be considered reliable (such as when
current inputs to the relay are not connected, or
sustained positive sequence current during fault
conditions is minimal), an external fuse failure
function can be used as an input to the relay. The
external 60 FL Function contact is connected across
any control/status input. The relay protection
functions are then blocked by an assertion of the
control/status input (INx), as a blocking function in
each functions respective setting screen.
60FL VT Fuse Loss Alarm Function
The 60FL alarm function is enabled by the internal
logic by selecting the FL option in the 60 FL
function setup screen. It is enable by the external
logic by selecting the appropriate control/status
input (INx) in the 60FL function setup screen.
A timer associated with the fuse loss alarm logic is
available. This timer is to assure proper coordination
for conditions that may appear as a fuse loss, such
as secondary VT circuit faults that will be cleared
by local low voltage circuit action (fuses or circuit
breakers). Ranges and increments are presented in
Figure 2-53.
60FL VT Fuse Loss
Some functions may operate inadvertently when a
VT fuse is blown or an event causes a loss of one,
two, or all three potentials to the relay. Provisions
are incorporated for both internal and external
potential loss detection and blocking of user defined
functions. The logic scheme and options are
illustrated in Figure 2-52.
Internal Fuse Loss Detection Logic
The internal logic scheme available will detect a
loss of one, two, and all three potentials.
For the loss of one or two potentials, positive and
negative sequence quantities are compared. The
presence of negative sequence voltage in the absence
of negative sequence current is considered to be a
fuse loss condition. An additional supervising condition
includes a minimum positive sequence voltage to
assure voltage is being applied to the relay.
For the loss of all three phase potentials, a
comparison of the three phase voltages is made to
the three phase currents. If all three potentials are
under 0.05 V
nom
, and all three currents are below
1.25 I
nom
combined with I
1
> 0.33A, a three phase
potential loss is declared. A seal in circuit is provided
to ensure a three phase fuse loss condition is not
declared during a three phase fault if the fault
current decays below the 1.25 I
nom
pickup setting.
Protection functions in the relay may be blocked by
an assertion of the fuse failure logic (FL), in each
functions respective setting screen. Typical
functions to block on a loss of potential event are
21, 27, 32, 40, 51V (for Voltage Control only), 67,
67N, 78 and 81.
The 60FL function does not have to be enabled in
order to use the FL as a blocking input in the relay
configuration menu.
The initiating control/status inputs are user-designated. The closing
of any of the externally connected contacts (across these in-
puts) will start the associated time delay to the 60FL function
operation. In order to use internal fuse loss logic for 60FL func-
tion, FL must be checked. Externally initiated fuse loss detec-
tion may be input to other status inputs. Inputs IN7IN14 must
be set using IPScom
.
The time delay is set to coordinate for conditions which may
appear as a fuse loss but will be corrected by other protection
(such as a secondary VT circuit fault which will be cleared by
local low voltage circuit action). This delay does not affect inter-
nal FL blocking option.
60FL INPUT INITIATE
FL i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
60FL 3 PHASE DETECT
disable enable
60FL DELAY
Cycles
Application 2
259
V
1

>

1
2
.
8

V
V
2

>

0
.
3
3

V
1
I
2

>

0
.
1
6
7

I
1
I
1

>

0
.
3
3

A
I
A

>

1
.
2
5

I
N
I
B

>

1
.
2
5

I
N
I
C

>

1
.
2
5

I
N
V
A

<

0
.
0
5

V
N
V
B

<

0
.
0
5

V
N
V
C

<

0
.
0
5

V
N
S
o
f
t
w
a
r
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
E
n
a
b
l
e
/
D
i
s
a
b
l
e
3

P
h
a
s
e

F
u
s
e
L
o
s
s

D
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
E
n
a
b
l
e
D
i
s
a
b
l
e
O
R
O
R
O
R
A
N
D
A
N
D
A
N
D
O
R
A
N
D
A
N
D
F

<

F
U
F

>

F
L
A
N
D
A
N
D
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

6
0
F
L

L
o
g
i
c
:

3

P
h
a
s
e

L
o
s
s

o
f

P
o
t
e
n
t
i
a
l
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

6
0
F
L

L
o
g
i
c
:

1

&

2

P
h
a
s
e

L
o
s
s

o
f

P
o
t
e
n
t
i
a
l
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

C
h
e
c
k
i
n
g
I
1
V
e
r
i
f
i
e
s

O
n
-
L
i
n
e

c
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n
V
A
,
B
,
C
I
n
d
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

3
-
p
h
a
s
e

l
o
s
s

o
f

p
o
I
A
,
B
,
C
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
s

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

d
u
r
i
n
g

f
a
u
l
t
s
S
e
a
l
-
i
n

c
i
r
c
u
i
t

e
n
s
u
r
e
s

l
o
g
i
c

d
o
e
s
n
'
t

p
r
o
a
n

o
u
t
p
u
t

d
u
r
i
n
g

3
-
p
h
a
s
e

f
a
u
l
t

w
h
e
n

c
u
r
d
e
c
a
y
s

b
e
l
o
w

1
.
2
5

I
N
(
.
0
6
7

A
)
*
*

V
a
l
u
e
s

i
n

p
a
r
e
n
t
h
e
s
e
s

a
p
p
l
y
t
o

a

1

A

C
T

s
e
c
o
n
d
a
r
y

r
a
t
i
n
g
.
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

"
F
L
"
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
I
N
x
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

F
u
s
e
L
o
s
s

F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
T
D
e
la
y
6
0
F
L

A
l
a
r
m

F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
i
n
i
t
i
a
t
e

b
y

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

"
F
L
"

o
r
S
t
a
t
u
s

I
n
p
u
t

C
o
n
t
a
c
t

I
N
x
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

B
l
o
c
k
S
i
g
n
a
l

b
y

I
N
x

f
r
o
m

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

F
L
6
0
F
L

A
l
a
r
m

S
i
g
n
a
l
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

B
l
o
c
k
S
i
g
n
a
l

b
y

I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

F
L

L
o
g
i
c
F
L
V
1
V
e
r
i
f
i
e
s

V
T

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

i
s

a
p
p
l
i
e
d
.
V
2
P
r
o
v
i
d
e
s

i
n
d
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

b
l
o
w
n

f
u
s
e
.
I
2
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
s

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

d
u
r
i
n
g

p
h
a
s
e
-
p
h
a
s
e

f
a
u
l
t
s
.
I
1
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
s

o
u
t
p
u
t

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
s

f
r
o
m

c
h
a
t
t
e
r
i
n
g

w
h
e
r
e

a

f
u
s
e

b
l
o
w
s

d
u
r
i
n
g

n
o

l
o
a
d

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
.
Figure 2-52 Fuse Loss (60FL) Function Logic
260
(60FL) - VT FUSE-LOSS DETECTION
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Input Initiate
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
Three Phase Fuse Loss Detection: Enable: Disable:
Delay: 1 Cycle 8160 Cycles
60FL
Expanded I/Os
X ?
Save Cancel
Expanded Input Initiate
F60FL
Figure 2-53 Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges
Application 2
261
64B/F Field Ground Protection
64F Field Ground Detection
Typical connections for Field Ground Protection
applications (including hydro turbine-generator and
brushless generators) is given in Figure 2-54. This
function requires the connection of an external
coupler (M-3921). To improve accuracy and
minimize the effects of stray capacitance, the
M-3921 Field Ground Coupler should be mounted
close to the exciter. Connections from the coupler
to the relay should use low capacitance shielded
cable, and be as short as possible. Cable shield
should be terminated at the relay end to the Relay
Ground Stud (See Figure 5-9, External Connections).
If cabling between the coupler and relay exceeds
100 feet, provisions should be made for in circuit
calibration to nullify the effects of cabling
capacitance. See Section 6.4, Auto Calibration, for
calibration procedure.
The Field Ground function provides detection of
insulation breakdown between the excitation field
winding and the ground. There are two pickup and
time delay settings, and one adjustable injection
frequency setting for the 64F function. The adjustable
frequency is provided to compensate for the amount
of capacitance across the field winding and the
ground so that the function accuracy is improved.
The minimum time delay should be set greater than
(2/IF + 1) seconds. Where IF = Injection frequency.
Ranges and increments are presented in Figure 2-55.
64F #1 PICKUP
kOhm
64F #1 DELAY
Cycles
64F #2 PICKUP
kOhm
64F #2 DELAY
Cycles
Table 2-5 gives typical frequency settings based on
the rotor capacitance. The rotor capacitance can be
measured with a capacitance meter by connecting
the meter across the field winding to ground.
Factors Affecting 64F Performance
Some excitation systems include shaft voltage
suppressors which include capacitors that are
installed between the +/- field and ground. The effect
of these capacitors is given by the following equation:
R J JJ JJ
___1___
(2 IF C)
where:
R = Parallel winding-ground resitance
IF = Injection frequency setting
C = Capacitance value
To minimize this effect the following my be
implemented:
The injection frequency setting can be
reduced, however accuracy decreases
as a result.
With the concurrence of the exciter
manufacturer, surge capacitors rated at
a lower value may be installed.
This setting should not exceed 80% of the ungrounded resitance value
to prevent nuisance tripping. Typical setting for the 64F #1 pickup
element for alarming is 20 Kohms.
Typical delay setting for tripping is 800 cycles.
Typical setting for 64F #2 pickup element for tripping is 5 Kohms.
Typical delay setting for alarming is 180 cycles.
262
PROCESSOR
PROTECTION RELAY
M-3425A
Squarewave
Generator
Signal
Measurement and
Processing
Field Ground
Detection
37
35
36
Relay Ground Stud
Coupling
Network
M-3921
TB5
TB4
TB1
V
f
Shield
TB3
TB2
TB1
V
out
Rear Terminal
Block Pin No.
Gen.
Rotor
Excitation
System
Rf.Cf
Shaft
Ground
Brush
Brushes
Ground/Generator Frame
Typical Field Ground Protection
TB3
TB2
TB1
Gen.
Rotor
Rf.Cf
Shaft
Ground
Brush
Measurement
Brush
Jumper TB2 to TB3 if
only one brush is used
Brushless Generator Application
64F Application for Brushless Generators
The 64F Function can be implemented on brushless
generators that employ a "measurement" brush (see
Figure 2-54 Detail C) to verify the integrity of field. In this
configuration generally only one field polarity is available.
Therefore, a suitably sized jumper must be installed from
TB2 to TB3 (Coupling Network box M-2931) and then to
the positive or negative field lead.
In some configurations the measurement brush is
continuously applied. In others the measurement brush is
applied periodically. In configurations that automatically lift
the measurement brush, the 64B Function must be
blocked by an input to the relay to prevent an alarm when
the measurement brush is lifted. If the 64B Function is not
desired, then the 64B Function should be disabled.
The 64F Function can not be used on brushless
generators utilizing LED coupling.
Detail A
TB3
TB2
TB1
Gen.
Rotor
Excitation
System
Rf.Cf
Water provides
alternate
ground path.
Brushes
Francis or Kaplan Turbine-Generator
Application
64F Application for Hydro Turbine-Generators
The application of the 64F Function requires a ground
return path, either through a shaft ground brush (Figure
2-54 Detail A) or though an alternate ground path (i.e.
water for some hydro machines.)
Hydro Turbine-Generator unit shafts that extend into the
water with no electrical isolation between the turbine shaft
and the generator shaft can use the water as the alternate
ground path (see Figure 2-54 Detail B). In this application,
the water provides the alternate ground path and a shaft
grounding brush is not required. Francis and Kaplan
Turbine Generators usually meet this application
requirement.
A shaft ground brush must be utilized for the 64F Function
on Pelton Hydro Turbine-Generator applications.
Detail B
Detail C
Figure 2-54 M-3921 Field Ground Coupler
Application 2
263
64B Brush Lift-Off Detection
Brush Lift-Off Detection (64B) provides detection of
open brushes of the rotor shaft. This function works
in conjunction with the 64F Field Ground Detection
function, and requires the M-3921 Field Ground
Coupler.
8 88 88 WARNING: Machine should be off-line and
field excitation should be off during the
capacitance measurement.
NOTE: Field breaker should be closed for the
capacitance measurements.
o t g n i d n i W d l e i F
e c n a t i c a p a C d n u o r G
g n i t t e S y c n e u q e r F l a c i p y T
1 2 o t F z H 2 5 . 0
3 o t 2 F z H 9 4 . 0
4 o t 3 F z H 6 4 . 0
5 o t 4 F z H 3 4 . 0
5 6 o t F z H 9 3 . 0
7 o t 6 F z H 5 3 . 0
8 o t 7 F z H 2 3 . 0
9 o t 8 F z H 0 3 . 0
0 1 o t 9 F z H 8 2 . 0
0 1 > F z H 6 2 . 0
Table 2-5 Typical Frequency Settings
(64F/B) - FIELD GROUND PROTECTION
64F#1
64F#2
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
64B
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
5 KOhms
1 Cycle
100 KOhms
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
5 KOhms
1 Cycle
100 KOhms
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
0 mV
1 Cycle
5000 mV
8160 Cycles
Frequency: 0.10 Hz 1.00 Hz
F64F/B
Figure 2-55 Field Ground Protection (64B/F) Setpoint Ranges
264
When 64B operates, indicating open brush
conditions, the 64F Function cannot detect a field
ground. For most generators, when the brushes of
the rotor shaft are lifted, the capacitance across the
field winding and the ground significantly reduces to
less than 0.15 F. The 64B Function analyzes this
capacitance-related signal, and initiates an output
contact when it detects an open brush condition.
Typically, this output is used to alert operating
personnel of an open brush condition. Ranges and
increments are presented in Figure 2-58. The typical
pickup setting is listed in Table 2-6, Typical Brush
Lift-Off Pickup Settings.
In order to assure correct setting, it is recommended
that the actual operating value be predetermined
during the final stage of the relay installation. By
introducing a brush-open condition, the actual value
can be easily obtained from the relay. The following
procedure can be used to obtain the actual operating
value of the 64B during an open brush condition:
8 88 88 WARNING: Machine should be off-line and
field excitation should be off during the
capacitance measurement.
NOTE: Field breaker should be closed for the
capacitance measurements.
64B PICKUP
_______________ mV
64B DELAY
_____________ cycles
64B/F FREQUENCY
_______________ Hz
1. After installation has been completed,
determine the rotor capacitance, as
outlined for the 64F function.
2. With the machine still off-line, apply
power to the relay and set the 64B/F
operating frequency in accordance with
the value listed in Table 2-5, Typical
Frequency Settings.
3. Introduce a brush-open condition by
disconnecting the rotor brushes or lifting
the brushes from their ground. Observe
the 64B voltage value displayed by
IPScom or the relay. The displayed value
is the actual measured operating value
of the 64B function.
4. To ensure correct operation and prevent
erroneous trips, the Pickup Setting for
the 64B Lift-off condition should be set
at 8090% of the actual operating value.
The 64B/F Frequency is a shared setting common to both the 64B
and 64F Functions. If either function is enabled, this setpoint is
available, and should be set to compensate for the amount of
capacitance across the field winding and ground, so that the
measurement accuracy is improved.
To minimize measurement errors, the 64B/F frequency should
be set according to the amount of capacitance across the field
winding and the ground. Table 2-5 includes typical settings of the
frequency for capacitance, ranging from 1 F to 10 F.
e c n a t i c a p a C f f O - t f i L h s u r B t n e l a v i u q E
f f O - t f i L h s u r B l a c i p y T
g n i t t e S p u k c i P
5 2 . 0 ~ 5 0 . 0 F V m 0 0 5 2
Table 2-6 Typical Brush Lift-Off Pickup Setting
Application 2
265
The expected 20 Hz current during no fault condition
is given by:
V
20
N
2
I
NF
=
X
CS
Where V20 is the 20 Hz voltage measured across
the load resistor RL and X
CS
is the capacitive
reactance of the gnereator stator winding and unit
transformer referred to the grounding transformer
secondary. N is the turn ratio of the grounded
transformer. The pickup setting should be based on
the required insulation resistance setting. In order
to detect a fault of 5,000 Ohms on the generator
stator, the pickup current should be set at:
I
PICKUP
=
V
20
N
2
5000
2
+ X
CS
2
20 Hz CT Ratio
When the generator is operating normally (no ground
fault) only a small amount of 20 Hz current will flow
as a result of the stator capacitance to ground.
When a ground fault occurs anywhere on the
generator stator windings the 20 Hz current will
increase. The 64S function will issue a trip signal
after a set time delay when the measured 20 Hz
current exceeds the pickup current as illustrated in
Figure 2-57.
The 64S protection can be blocked by Undervoltage
Inhibit. If the 20 Hz voltage (nominal 25 V) is less
than the Undervoltage Inhibit setting (and
Undervoltage Inhibit is enabled), the 64S function
will be blocked. For cases where the Load Resistor
(RL) is small, the Undervoltage Inhibit should not be
enabled, as the voltage will be small.
The 59N function (90 to 95%) should also be used
in conjunction with 64S protection to provide backup.
CAUTION: Dangerous high voltages may be
present at the generator terminals if the 20 Hz
injection voltage is not removed when the generator
is taken out of service.
If the 20 Hz injection voltage generator receives
power from the generator terminal voltage, then the
20 Hz injection voltage generator will be automatically
switched off whenever the generator terminal voltage
is not present.
64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low
Frequency Signal Injection
NOTE: The Stator Ground Protection function
(64S) must be selected when the
M-3425A is initially ordered.
The 100% stator ground fault protection is provided
by injecting an external 20 Hz signal into the neutral
of the generator. The protection is provided when
the machine is on-line as well as off-line (provided
that the 20 Hz generator and relay are powered on.)
This scheme requires the following external
components in addition to M-3425A protection
system:
20 Hz Signal-generator (BECO Part No.
430-00426) (Siemens 7XT33)
Band-pass fi l ter. (BECO Part No.
430-00427) (Siemens 7XT34)
20 Hz Measuring Current Transformer, 400/
5 A CT (BECO Part No. 430-00428)
(ITI CTW3-60-T50--401)
NOTE: Chapter 5, Installation contains low
frequency signal injection equipment
installation information.
The voltage signal generated by the 20 Hz signal-
generator is injected into the secondary of the
generator neutral grounding transformer through a
band-pass filter. The band-pass filter passes the 20
Hz signal and rejects out-of-band signals. The output
of the 20 Hz band-pass filter is connected to the V
N
input of the M-3425A relay through a suitable voltage
divider, that limits the M-3425A to O OO OO 200 V ac (the
voltage generator may be bypassed if the expected
50/60 Hz voltage during a phase-to-ground fault of
the generator is O OO OO 200 V.) The 20Hz current is also
connected to the I
N
input of the M-3425A, through
the 20Hz current transformer.
64S PICKUP
mAmps
64S VOLT INHIBIT
disable ENABLE
64S VOLT INHIBIT
Volts
64S DELAY
Cycles
266
R
L
1B1
1A1
1B4
1A3 1A4
20 Hz
Band Pass
Filter
20 Hz
Generator
4A1
1A1
1A2
1A3
2A3
2A1
3A2
3A1 4A3
Bl
3A3
Supply
Voltage
DC AC
+V
Aux
V
A(L1)
-V
Aux
V
B(L2)
V
C(L3)
External
Block
Device
Operative
44 45
M-3425A
52 53
400A
5A
L K
l k
Max. 200 V
V
N
I
N
Neutral
Grounding
Transformer
Wiring
Shielded
20 Hz CT
400/5 A
59N
High
Voltage
Low
Voltage
Figure 2-56 64S Function Component Connection Diagram
Equipment Description BECO Part No.
Siemens
7XT33
20 Hz Signal-Generator 430-00426
OEM Part No.
Siemens
7XT34
430-00427
ITI
CTWS-60-T50-401
430-00428
20 Hz Band-pass Filter
20 Hz Measuring Current Transformer
400-5 A CT
Table 2-7 Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment Part Number Cross Reference
Application 2
267
20 Hz Injection Voltage
I
20
5 V 10 V 15 V 20 V 25 V 30 V 35 V 40 V
140 %
60 %
TRIP
45 V 0 V
64S
Pickup
Current
Figure 2-57 64S Function Time Delay Pickup Current Correlation
(64S) - 100% STATOR GROUND
#1
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Pickup:
Delay:
2 mA
1 Cycle
40 mA
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Undervoltage Inhibit:
Enable Disable
5 V 30 V
F64S
Figure 2-58 100% Stator Ground Protection (64S) Setpoint Ranges
268
calculated using V
A
, V
B
and V
C
inputs. The function
provides both definite time and inverse time
elements. The inverse time element provides several
curves. The curves available for use are shown in
Appendix D, Inverse Time Curves. They cover a
range from 1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. An
additional one cycle time delay should be added to
these curves in order to obtain the relay operating
time. Inverse time curves saturate beyond 20 times
pickup. For currents in excess of 20 times pickup,
operating times are fixed at the 20 time pickup
level.
To obtain maximum sensitivity for fault currents,
the directional element is provided with a maximum
sensitivity angle adjustment (MSA). This setting is
common to both the 67NDT and 67NIT elements.
The pickup sensitivity of the relay remains constant
for 90 either side of the so-called Maximum
Sensitivity Angle (MSA). At angles over 90 from
MSA, the relay operation is blocked. Typical MSA
setting for a generator internal ground fault protector
is approximately 150.
67N Residual Directional Overcurrent
The Residual Directional Overcurrent function (67N)
provides protection from ground faults. The 67N
function can provide generator ground fault
protecti on. It can al so provi de di recti onal
discrimination when multiple generators are bused
together. The 67N Function is subject to the following
configuration limitations:
V
X
polarization cannot be selected if 25
(Sync) function is enabled.
3V
0
polarization can only be used with
Line-Ground VT configuration.
67N Function is not available if 87GD is
enabled.
The 67N Function operates on the residual current
either from internal calculation (3I
0
) using I
A
, I
B
and
I
C
or using a residual current input from I
N
input of
the relay (this is preferred compared to 3I
0
). The
relay can be polarized with the neutral voltage (V
N
),
broken delta voltage connected at V
X
input or 3V
0
Figure 2-59 Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Trip Characteristics
Application 2
269
Pickup value for the 67N element.
Directional discrimination enable. When disabled, this function
will work like a 50N.
Time Delay setting.
Inverse Time Pickup
Directional discrimination enabled. When disabled, this function
will operate like 51N.
Select the inverse time curve.
Time dial setting
See Figure 2-59 for Max Sensitivity Angle (MSA) settings.
Select the operating current.
Select the polarization voltage. If 3V
0
is selected, VT configu-
ration must be set to Line-Ground.
67NDT PICKUP
______________ Amps
67NDT DIR ELEMENT
disable ENABLE
67NDT DELAY
_____________ Cycles
67NIT PICKUP
______________ Amps
67NIT DIR ELEMENT
disable ENABLE
67NIT CURVE
bdef binv bvinv beinv
67NIT TIME DIAL
________________
67N MAX SENSITIVITY ANGLE
____________ Degrees
67N OPERATING CURRENT
3I0 in
67N POLARIZING QUANTITY
3V0 vn vx
270
(67N) - RESIDUAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Note: VX cannot be selected if 25 (Sync) function is enabled.
3V0 can only be used with Line-Ground VT configuration.
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Expanded I/Os
Def. Time
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Delay:
0.5 A
1 Cycle
240.0 A
8160 Cycles
Enable Disable Directional Element:
Inv. Time
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Pickup:
Time Dial:
0.25 A
0.5
12.00 A
11.0
Enable Disable Directional Element:
Max Sensitivity Angle: 0
o
359
o
3I0 IN Operating Current:
3V0 (Calculated) VN VX Polarizing Quantity:
F67N
Curves
BECO Definite Time
IECEI
BECO Inverse
IECLTI
BECO Very Inverse
IEEE Moderately Inv.
BECO Extremely Inverse
IEEE Very Inverse
IECI
IEEE Extremely InverseI
IECVI
Figure 2-60 Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Setpoint Ranges
Application 2
271
78 Out-of-Step
The Out-of-Step function (78) is used to protect the
generator from out-of-step or pole slip conditions.
This function uses one set of blinders, along with a
supervisory MHO element. Ranges and increments
are presented in Figure 2-63.
The pickup area is restricted to the shaded area in
Figure 2-61, Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics, defined
by the inner region of the MHO circle, the region to the
right of the blinder A and the region to the left of blinder
B. For operation of the blinder scheme, the operating
point (positive sequence impedance) must originate
outside either blinder A or B, and swing through the
pickup area for a time greater than or equal to the time
delay setting and progress to the opposite blinder from
where the swing had originated. When this scenario
happens, the tripping logic is complete. The contact
will remain closed for the amount of time set by the
seal-in timer delay.
X
T
= Transformer Reactance
X
S
= System Reactance
X
d
= Transient Reactance of the Generator
Consider, for example, Figure 2-62. If the Out-of-
step swing progresses to impedance Z
0
(t
0
), the
MHO element and the blinder A element will both
pick up. As the swing proceeds and crosses blinder
B at Z
1
(t
1
), blinder B will pick up. When the swing
reaches Z
2
(t
2
), blinder A will drop out. If TRIP ON
MHO EXIT option is disabled and the timer has
expired (t
2
t
1
>time delay), then the trip circuit is
complete. If the TRIP ON MHO EXIT option is
enabled and the timer has expired, then for the trip
to occur the swing must progress and cross the
MHO circle at Z
3
(t
3
) where the MHO element drops
out. Note the timer is active only in the pickup
region (shaded area). If the TRIP ON MHO EXIT
option is enabled, a more favorable tripping angle is
achieved, which reduces the breaker tripping duty.
The relay can also be set with a Pole Slip Counter.
The relay will operate when the number of pole slips
are greater than the setting, provided the Pole Slip
Reset Time was not expired. Typically, the Pole
Slip Counter is set to 1, in which case the Pole Slip
Reset Time is not applicable.
Typical setting is (1.5X
T
+2X
d
)
Typical setting is 2X
d
.
Typical setting is (1/2) (X
d
+ X
T
+ X
S
) tan((/2)). Typical
value for is 120.
Typical setting for is 90.
The time delay should be set based on the stability study. In
the absence of such a study, it can be set between 3 and 6
cycles.
This setting is typically enabled.
Typical setting is 1 pole slip.
Typical setting is 120 cycles.
78 DIAMETER
______________ Ohms
78 OFFSET
______________ Ohms
78 BLINDER IMPEDANCE
______________ Ohms
78 IMPEDANCE ANGLE
____________ Degrees
78 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
78 TRIP ON MHO EXIT
disable enable
78 POLE SLIP COUNT
_____________ slips
78 POLE SLIP RESET TIME
_____________ Cycles
272
SYSTEM
A B
R
P G
N
F
H
M
MHO
ELEMENT
ELEMENTS
GEN
(X
'
d
)
TRANS
O
X
BLINDER
C
X
T
X
S
D

d
'
SWING
LOCUS
1.5 X
T
2X
d

Figure 2-62 Out-of-Step Protection Settings
A B
Z3(t3)
Z2(t2)
Z1(t1)
Z0(t0)
Figure 2-61 Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics
Application 2
273
(78) - OUT OF STEP
#1
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Blinder Impedance:
Impedance Angle:
Pole Slip Counter:
Pole Slip Reset Time:
Delay:
Trip on MHO Exit: Enable Disable
0.1 Ohm
- 100.0 Ohms
0.1 Ohm
0
1
1 Cycle
1 Cycle
100.0 Ohms
100.0 Ohms
50.0 Ohms
90
20
8160 Cycles
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
F78
Figure 2-63 Out-of-Step (78) Setpoint Ranges
274
81 Frequency
The Frequency function (81) provides either
overfrequency or underfrequency protection of the
generator. It has four independent pickup and time
delay settings. The overfrequency mode is
automatically selected when the frequency setpoint
is programmed higher than the base frequency (50
or 60 Hz), and the underfrequency mode selected
when the setpoint is programmed below the base
frequency. Ranges and increments are presented in
Figure 2-65.
The steam turbine is usually considered to be more
restrictive than the generator at reduced frequencies
because of possible natural mechanical resonance
in the many stages of the turbine blades. If the
generator speed is close to the natural frequency of
any of the blades, there will be an increase in
vibration. Cumulative damage due to this vibration
can lead to cracking of the blade structure.
Sample settings of the 81 function are shown in
Fi gure 2-64. The frequency functi ons are
81 #1 PICKUP
_______________ Hz
81 #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
81 #2 PICKUP
_______________ Hz
81 #2 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
81 #3 PICKUP
_______________ Hz
81 #3 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
81 #4 PICKUP
_______________ Hz
81 #4 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
automatically disabled when the input voltage
(positive sequence) is very low (typically between
2.5 V and 15 V, based on the frequency.)
The 81 function should be disabled using breaker
contact when the unit is offline.
These magnitude and time settings describe a curve
(as shown in Figure 2-64, Example of Frequency
(81) Trip Characteristics) which is to be coordinated
with the capability curves of the turbine and generator
as well as the system underfrequency load-shedding
program. These capabilities are given by a
description of areas of prohibited operation, restricted
time operation, and continuous allowable operation.
The underfrequency function is usually connected
to trip the machine whereas the overfrequency
function is generally connected to an alarm.
In order to prevent misoperation during switching
transients, the time delay should be set to greater
than five (5) cycles.
Application 2
275
(81) - FREQUENCY
#1
Pickup:
Delay:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
67.00 Hz
65500 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
#2
Pickup:
Delay:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
67.00 Hz
65500 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
#4 Pickup:
Delay:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
67.00 Hz
65500 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
F81
Expanded I/Os
#3
Pickup:
Delay:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
67.00 Hz
65500 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Figure 2-65 Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges
61.0
60.8
60.6
60.4
60.2
60.0
59.8
59.6
59.4
59.2
59.0
Time (cycles)
8
1
O
v
e
r

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

(
H
z
)
8
1
U
n
d
e
r

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

(
H
z
)
Trip
Trip
Over Frequency
Time Delay #2
Over Frequency
Time Delay #1
Under Frequency
Time Delay #4
Under Frequency
Time Delay #3
Over Frequency
Magnitude #1
Under Frequency
Magnitude #4
Over Frequency
Magnitude #2
Under Frequency
Magnitude #3
Figure 2-64 Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics
276
81A Frequency Accumulator
Frequency Accumulation feature (81A) provides an
indication of the amount of off frequency operation
accumulated.
Turbine blades are designed and tuned to operate at
rated frequencies, operating at frequencies different
than rated can result in blade resonance and fatigue
damage. In 60 Hz machines, the typical operating
frequency range for 18 to 25 inch blades is 58.5 to
61.5 Hz and for 25 to 44 inch blades is between
59.5 and 60.5 Hz. Accumulated operation, for the
life of the machine, of not more than 10 minutes for
frequencies between 56 and 58.5 Hz and not more
than 60 minutes for frequencies between 58.5 and
59.5 Hz is acceptable on typical machines.
The 81A function can be configured to track off
nominal frequency operation by either set point or
when the frequency is within a frequency band.
When using multiple frequency bands, the lower
limit of the previous band becomes the upper limit
81A #1 HIGH BAND PICKUP
_______________ Hz
81A #1 LOW BAND PICKUP
_______________ Hz
81A #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
_______________ Hz
81A #2 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
_______________ Hz
81A #3 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
_______________ Hz
81A #4 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
_______________ Hz
81A #5 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
_______________ Hz
81A #6 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
for the next band, i.e., Low Band #2 is the upper
limit for Band #3, and so forth. Frequency bands
must be used in sequential order, 1 to 6. Band #1
must be enabled to use Bands #2#6. If any band is
disabled, all following bands are disabled.
When frequency is within an enabled band limit,
accumulation time starts (there is an internal ten
cycle delay prior to accumulation), this allows the
underfrequency blade resonance to be established
to avoid unnecessary accumulation of time. When
accumulated duration is greater than set delay,
then the 81A function operated the programmed
output contact. The contact can be used to alert the
operator or trip the machine.
The accumulator status can be set to preserve the
accumulated information from previous devices.
This allows the relay to begin accumulating
information at a pre-defined value. This setpoint is
only available through IPScom
Communications
Software.
Application 2
277
0 5 10 15
Time (mins)
81-4 LB
81-3 LB
81-2 LB
81-1 LB
81-1 HB
Fn
Example- Band
#1 Band
#2 Band
#3 Band
#4 Band
#5 Band
Figure 2-66 Frequency Accumulator (81A) Example Bands
High Pickup:
Low Pickup:
Delay:
Acc. Status:
50.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
0 Cycle
67.00 Hz
67.00 Hz
360000 Cycles
360000 Cycles
#1
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
@
Reset
#3
#5
#2
#4
#6
(81A) FREQUENCY ACCUMULATOR
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
F81A
Reset
Low Pickup:
Delay:
Acc. Status:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
0 Cycle
67.00 Hz
360000 Cycles
360000 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
@
Reset
Low Pickup:
Delay:
Acc. Status:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
0 Cycle
67.00 Hz
360000 Cycles
360000 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
@
Reset
Low Pickup:
Delay:
Acc. Status:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
0 Cycle
67.00 Hz
360000 Cycles
360000 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
@
Reset
Low Pickup:
Delay:
Acc. Status:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
0 Cycle
67.00 Hz
360000 Cycles
360000 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
@
Reset
Low Pickup:
Delay:
Acc. Status:
50.00 Hz
3 Cycles
0 Cycle
67.00 Hz
360000 Cycles
360000 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
@
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
Figure 2-67 Frequency Accumulator (81A) Setpoint Ranges
278
81R Rate of Change of Frequency
The Rate of Change of Frequency function (81R) can
be used for load shedding or tripping applications.
The function also has an automatic disable feature
which disables 81R function during unbalanced faults
and other system disturbances. This feature uses
negative sequence voltage to block the 81R function.
When the measured negative sequence voltage
exceeds the inhibit setting, the function 81R and
metering are blocked. The time delay and magnitude
settings of 81R should be based on simulation studies.
The ranges and increments are shown in Figure 2-68.
@ : WARNING, You have selected an output!
(81R) - RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Expanded I/Os
#1 Pickup:
Delay:
0.10 Hz/S
3 Cycles
20.0 Hz/S
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
#2
Pickup:
Delay:
0.10 Hz/S
3 Cycles
20.0 Hz/S
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Neg Seq.
Volt Inhibit:
0% 99%
F81R
Figure 2-68 Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges
81R #1 PICKUP
______________ Hz/s
81R #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
81R #2 PICKUP
______________ Hz/s
81R #2 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
81R NEG SEQ VOLT INHIBIT
_______________ %
Application 2
279
87 Phase Differential
The Phase Differential function (87) is a percentage
differential with an adjustable slope of 1100%.
Although this protection is used to protect the
machine from all internal winding faults, single-
phase to ground faults in machines with high
impedance grounding may have currents less than
the sensitivity of the differential relay (typically
between 3 and 30 primary amps). Ranges and
Turn-to-turn faults are not detected by differential
relays because the current into the generator equals
the current out (see functions 50DT and 59X for
turn-to-turn fault protection.) Even though the
percentage differential relay is more tolerant of CT
errors, all CTs should have the same characteristics
and accuracies.
A typical setting is 0.3 amps.
A typical setting is 10%.
A typical setting is one cycle. Typical settings given above assume
matched current transformer performance, and that transformer in-
rush of the unit transformer does not cause dc saturation of the
generator CTs. If there is a significant difference in current trans-
former ratings (C800 vs C200, for example), or if saturation of the
generator CTs is expected during energizing of the step up trans-
former, more appropriate settings might be 0.5 A pick up, 20% slope,
and a delay of 5 to 8 cycles.
If line side and neutral side CTs do not have the same ratio, the ratio
error can be corrected (the line side measured current is multiplied
by the phase CT correction settings.)
Line Side CTR
Phase CT Correction =
Neutral Side CTR
To provide restraint for CT saturation at high offset
currents, the slope is automatically adjusted (at a
restraining current equal to two times nominal current)
to four times the slope setting, see Figure 2-69.
For very high currents in large generators, the
proximity of CTs and leads in different phases can
cause unbalanced currents to flow in the secondaries.
These currents must be less than the minimum
sensitivity of the relay.
There are two elements in this function. Element #2
is intended to provide phase differential protection
for SFC (Static Frequency Converter) starting gas
turbine generator applications. Element #1 should
be disabled with a contact blocking input during a
converter start operation (generator off-line), since
the current is carried by only neutral side CTs and
the resulting differential current may mis-operate
87#1 function. The 87#2 element, which is set with
a higher current pickup, will still provide protection
for this condition.
87 #1 PICKUP
______________ Amps
87 #1 SLOPE
_______________ %
87 #1 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
87 #2 PICKUP
______________ Amps
87 #2 SLOPE
_______________ %
87 #2 DELAY
_____________ Cycles
87 PHASE CT CORRECTION
________________
280
@ IRES=2xINOM
Restraint Current
((I
A
x

CTC)+I
a
)/2, ((I
B
x

CTC)+I
b
)/2, ((I
C
x

CTC)+I
c
)/2
((I
A
x

CTC)-I
a
),
((I
B
x

CTC)-I
b
),
((I
C
x

CTC)-I
c
)
MIN PU
TRIP
SLOPE
(set)
SLOPE
(4xset)
BLOCK
Where I
A
and I
a
are generator high side and neutral side currents respectively, and CTC is the
CT Phase correction.
Figure 2-69 Differential Relay (87) Operating Characteristics
(87) - PHASE DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT
#1
#2
Pickup:
Delay:
Percent Slope:
0.20 A
1 Cycle
1%
3.00 A
8160 Cycles
100%
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
Expanded I/Os
Pickup:
Delay:
Percent Slope:
0.20 A
1 Cycle
1%
3.00 A
8160 Cycles
100%
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Phase CT Correction: 0.50 2.00
F87
Figure 2-70 Phase Differential (87) Setpoint Ranges
Application 2
281
87GD Ground (Zero Sequence) Differential
The Zero Sequence Differential function (87GD)
provides ground fault protection for low impedance
grounded generator applications. High sensitivity
and fast operation can be obtained using this
function. Ranges and increments are presented in
Figure 2-71.
The relay provides a CT Ratio Correction Factor
(R
C
) which removes the need for auxiliary CTs when
the phase and neutral CT ratios are different.
When the system can supply zero sequence current
to the ground fault (such as when several generators
are bussed together), the 87GD function operates
directionally. The directional element calculates the
product (3I
0
I
N
Cos) for directional indication. The
relay will operate only if I
0
(Zero sequence current
derived from phase CTs) and I
N
(Neutral current
from Neutral CT) have the opposite polarity, which
is the case for internal generator faults.
87GD PICKUP
______________ Amps
87GD DELAY
_____________ Cycles
87GD C.T. RATIO CORRECT
________
A typical setting is 0.2 amps. (Relay amps = primary amps CT
ratio.) For higher values of R
C
, noise may create substantial
differential current making higher pickup settings desirable.
CAUTION: Do NOT set the Delay to less than 2 Cycles.
In order to prevent mis-operation during external faults with CT
saturation conditions, a time delay of 6 cycles or higher is
recommended.
CT Ratio Correction Factor = (Phase CT Ratio)/(Neutral CT Ratio)
The advantage of directional supervision is the
security against ratio errors and CT saturation during
faults external to the protected generator.
The directional element is inoperative if the residual
current (3I
0
) is approximately less than 0.2 A, in
which case the algorithm automatically disables the
directional element and the 87GD function becomes
non-directional differential. The pickup quantity is
then calculated as the difference between the
corrected triple zero-sequence current (R
C
3I
0
) and
the neutral current (I
N
). The magnitude of the
difference (R
C
3I
0
I
N
) is compared to the relay pickup.
For security purposes during external high phase-
fault currents causing CT saturation, this function is
disabled any time the value of I
N
is less than
approximately 0.20 amps.
NOTE: When 87GD is enabled, 67N function is
not available.
(87GD) - GROUND DIFFERENTIAL
#1
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
0.20 A
1 Cycle
0.10
10.00 A
8160 Cycles
7.99
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Pickup:
Delay:
CT Ratio Corr:
@
F87GD
Figure 2-71 Ground Differential (87GD) Setpoint Ranges
282
Breaker Monitoring
The Breaker Monitoring feature calculates an estimate
of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by
measuring and integrating the current (IT) or current
squared (I
2
T) passing through the breaker contacts
during the interruption period. The per-phase values
are added to an accumulated total for each phase,
and then compared to a user-programmed threshold
value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase,
the relay can operate a programmable output contact.
The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed
Expanded Inputs IN7IN14 (if equipped) must be set using IPScom.
Expanded Outputs OUT9OUT23 (if equipped) must be set using
IPScom.
(BM) - BREAKER MONITOR
Save Cancel
X ?
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/O Initiate
#1
0 KA
0.1 Cycle
50000 KA
4095.9 Cycles
Pickup:
Delay:
Blocking Inputs
6 5 4 3 2 1
Input Initiate
6 5 4 3 2 1
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Output Initiate
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 KA Cycles
0 KA Cycles
0 KA Cycles
50000 KA Cycles
50000 KA Cycles
50000 KA Cycles
Phase A:
Phase B:
Phase C:
Preset Accumulators
Timing Method Select: IT I^2T
FL
FBM
Figure 2-72 Breaker Monitor (BM) Setpoint Ranges
BM PICKUP
______ kA-cycles
BM INPUT INITIATE
i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1
BM OUTPUT INITIATE
08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
BM DELAY
____________ Cycles
BM TIMING METHOD
it i2t
as an actual value. The accumulation starts after a
set time delay from the trip initiate command to
account for the time it takes for the breaker to start
opening its contacts. The accumulation continues
until the current drops below 10% of the nominal
current setting or 10 cycles, whichever occurs first.
NOTE: Preset Accumulator Setpoints are only
available through IPScom
.
Application 2
283
External connections for the Trip Circuit Monitoring
function are shown in Figure 2-73. The default Trip
Circuit Monitor input voltage is 250 V dc. See Section
5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, Table 5-3
for other available trip circuit input voltage selections.
This function should be programmed to block when
the breaker is open, as indicated by 52b contact
input (IN1). If the TCM is monitoring a lockout relay,
a 86 contact input (INx) should be used to block
when the lockout relay is tripped.
When the Output Contact is open, and continuity
exists in the Trip Circuit, a small current flows that
activates the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If the Trip
Circuit is open, and the output contact is open, no
current flows and the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input is
52b
M-3425A
Trip Circuit
Monitoring Input
2
1
Aux Input
Output
Contact
Station
Battery
+
-
Other
Contacts
52a
52 or 86
Trip Coil
86 or
Figure 2-73 Trip Circuit Monitoring Input
deactivated. An Output Contact that is welded closed
would also cause the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input to
deactivate, indicating failure of the Output Contact.
When the Output Contact is closed, no current flows
in the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If the M-3425A
has issued a trip command to close the Output
Contact and Trip Circuit Monitoring Input remains
activated, this is an indication that the Output Contact
failed to close.
The output of the Trip Circuit Monitoring function can
be programmed as an alarm to alert maintenance
personnel.
(TC) - TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR
Expanded I/Os
Save Cancel
X ?
TC
Delay: 1 Cycle 8160 Cycles
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
FTC
Figure 2-74 Trip Circuit Monitor (TC) Setpoint Ranges
TCM DELAY
_____________ Cycles
284
IPSlogic
The relay provides six logic functions and associated
IPSlogic. The logic functions can be used to allow
external devices to trip through the relay, providing
additional target information for the external device.
More importantly, these functions can be used in
conjunction with IPSlogic to expand the capability
of the relay by allowing the user to define customized
operating logic.
Programming the IPSlogic can only be implemented
through IPScom
Communications Software. The

IPSlogic cannot be programmed using the Human-
Machine Interface (HMI).
IPS LOGIC
USE IPSCOM TO CONFIGURE
Application 2
285
B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g

I
n
t
p
u
t
s
S
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e

A
n
d
/
O
r
I
n
i
t
i
a
t
i
n
g

I
n
t
p
u
t
s
S
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e

A
n
d
/
O
r
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
a
b
l
e
I
n
p
u
t
s

1
-
6
*
I
n
p
u
t
s

7
-
1
4
I
n
i
t
i
a
t
i
n
g

F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

T
r
i
p
(
i
n
c
l
u
d
e
s

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s
)
S
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e

A
n
d
/
O
r
/
N
o
r
/
N
a
n
d
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
a
b
l
e
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
(
s
)

T
i
m
e
d

O
u
t
P
i
c
k
e
d

U
p
I
n
i
t
i
a
t
i
n
g

O
u
t
p
u
t
s
S
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e

A
n
d
/
O
r
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
a
b
l
e
O
u
t
p
u
t
s

1
-
8
*
O
u
t
p
u
t
s

9
-
2
3
I
n
i
t
i
a
t
e

V
i
a
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
P
o
i
n
t
S
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e

A
n
d
/
O
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e

A
n
d
/
O
r
I
n
i
t
i
a
t
e

V
i
a
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
P
o
i
n
t
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
a
b
l
e
I
n
p
u
t
s

1
-
6
*
I
n
p
u
t
s

7
-
1
4
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e
d
T
i
m
e

D
e
l
a
y
1
-

6
5
,
5
0
0

C
y
c
l
e
s
(
1
0
9
1

s
e
c
)
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e
d
P
r
o
f
i
l
e

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
G
r
o
u
p

1
-
4
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
e
d
O
u
t
p
u
t
s

1
-
8
*
O
u
t
p
u
t
s

1
-
2
3
L
o
g

T
a
r
g
e
t
I
P
S
l
o
g
i
c
A
c
t
i
v
a
t
e
d
L
o
g

P
i
c
k
u
p
T
h
i
s

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

I
P
S
l
o
g
i
c
i
n
i
t
i
a
t
e
s

t
h
e

F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

O
u
t
p
u
t
T
h
i
s

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

I
P
S
l
o
g
i
c

i
s
u
s
e
d

t
o

B
l
o
c
k

t
h
e

F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

O
u
t
p
u
t
*

F
o
r

u
n
i
t
s

w
i
t
h

E
x
p
a
n
d
e
d

I
/
O
T
h
i
s

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

I
P
S
l
o
g
i
c

i
s

u
s
e
d
t
o

a
c
t
i
v
a
t
e

t
h
e

d
e
s
i
r
e
d

O
u
t
p
u
t
Figure 2-75 IPSlogic Function Setup
286
Settings and Logic Applicable when
IPSlogic Function(s) programmed using
IPScom
There are four initiating input sources: Initiating

Outputs, Initiating Function Trips, Function Pickup
(including the IPSlogic Functions themselves),
Ini ti ati ng Inputs, and i ni ti ati on usi ng the
Communication Port. The only limitation is that an
IPSlogic Function may not be used to initiate itself.
There are two blocking input sources: Blocking
Inputs and blocking using the Communication Port.
The activation state of the input function selected in
the Initiating Function can be either timeout (Trip) or
pickup. The desired time delay for security
considerations can be obtained in the IPSlogic
Function time delay setting.
(IPS) IPSLogic X ?
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
#1
Initiate via Communication Point
Block via Communication Point
6 5 4 3 2 1
Initiating Inputs
Save Cancel
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
NOR
AND
Initiating Function Timeout
Initiating Function Pickup
Expanded Outputs
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
@
IPS #1
Activated
1 Cycle 8160 Cycles
Delay:
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
Expanded Blocking Inputs
Expanded Initiating Inputs
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Initiating Outputs
Expanded Initiating Outputs
0 Cycle 65500 Cycles
DO/RST Delay:
Dropout (DO) Timer Reset (RST) Timer
Profile
#1 #2 #3 #4 NA
Notes:
1. This logic gate may be selected as either AND or OR.
2. This logic gate may be selected as AND, OR, NOR, or NAND.
Figure 2-76 IPSlogic Function Programing
The IPSlogic Function can be programmed to
perform any or all of the following tasks:
Change the Active Setting Profile
Close an Output Contact
Be activated for use as an input to another
External Function
Since there are six IPSlogic Functions per setting
profile, depending on the number of different relay
settings defined, the scheme may provide up to 24
different logic schemes. The IPScom IPSlogic
Function programming screen is shown in Figure
2-76.
Application 2
287
X
OK
Cancel
o F21 #1
o F21 #2
o F21 #3
o F24DT #1
o F24DT #2
o F24IT
o F25S
o F25D
o F67NDT
o F67NIT
o F78
o F81 #1
o F81 #2
o F81 #3
o F81 #4
o F27TN #1
o F27TN #2
o F27 #1
o F27 #2
o F27 #3
o F32 #1
o F32 #2
o F32 #3
o F81A #1
o F81A #2
o F81A #3
o F81A #4
o F81A #5
o F81A #6
o F81R #1
o F81R #2
o F40 #1
o F40 #2
o F40VC1
o F40VC2
o F46DT
o F46IT
o F49 #1
o F49 #2
o F87 #1
o F87 #2
o F87GD
o IPSL #1
o IPSL #2
o IPSL #3
o IPSL #4
o IPSL #5
o IPSL #6
o F50BF
o F50 #1
o F50 #2
o F50N
o F50DT #1
o F50DT #2
o F5027
o F51N
o FBM
o FTC
o F51V
o F59 #1
o F59 #2
o F59 #3
o F59D
o F59N #1
o F59N #2
o F59N #3
o F59X_1
o F59X_2
o F60FL
o F64F #1
o F64F #2
o F64B
o F64S
Initiating Function Timeout
Figure 2-77 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout
X
OK
Cancel
o F21 #1
o F21 #2
o F21 #3
o F24DT #1
o F24DT #2
o F24IT
o F25S
o F25D
o F67NDT
o F67NIT
o F78
o F81 #1
o F81 #2
o F81 #3
o F81 #4
o F27TN #1
o F27TN #2
o F27 #1
o F27 #2
o F27 #3
o F32 #1
o F32 #2
o F32 #3
o F81A #1
o F81A #2
o F81A #3
o F81A #4
o F81A #5
o F81A #6
o F81R #1
o F81R #2
o F40 #1
o F40 #2
o F40VC1
o F40VC2
o F46DT
o F46IT
o F49 #1
o F49 #2
o F87 #1
o F87 #2
o F87GD
o IPSL #1
o IPSL #2
o IPSL #3
o IPSL #4
o IPSL #5
o IPSL #6
o F50BF
o F50 #1
o F50 #2
o F50N
o F50DT #1
o F50DT #2
o F5027
o F51N
o FBM
o FTC
o F51V
o F59 #1
o F59 #2
o F59 #3
o F59D
o F59N #1
o F59N #2
o F59N #3
o F59X_1
o F59X_2
o F60FL
o F64F #1
o F64F #2
o F64B
o F64S
Initiating Function Pickup
Figure 2-78 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup
288
DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature
The DO/RST timer can be set as either Dropout or
Reset mode. The operation of the Dropout Delay
Timer and the Reset Delay Timer are described
below.
Reset Delay Timer
The Reset Delay Timer logic is presented in Figure
2-80. The Reset Delay Timer feature allows the
user to delay the reset of the PU Time Delay Timer
and hold the accumulated timer value (A) for the
duration of the Reset Time Delay time period (B).
The Reset Delay Timer starts when the IPSlogic
PU Status drops out (C).
PU Status
PU Time Delay
Setting (30)
Output
25 35
Dropout Delay Timer
Seal in Delay
Seal in Delay
Dropout Delay
Cycles
PU Time Delay Timing
IPSlogic Functions (1 - 6)
A
B
C D
E
Figure 2-79 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram
Dropout Delay Timer
The Dropout Delay Timer logic is presented in
Figure 2-79. The Dropout Delay Timer feature allows
the user to affect an output time delay that starts
when the IPSlogic PU Status drops out (A) and can
hold the Output (D) status true beyound the Output
Seal In Delay value (C).
However, the Seal In Delay (E) may hold the Output
(B) true if the time after IPSlogic PU Status dropout
(A) and Dropout Delay Timer value (D) are less than
the Seal In Delay time (E).
Reset Delay Timer
PU Status
Output
25 25
Reset Delay
10 Cycles
12 8
Cycles
Reset
Delay
5
Seal In
Timer
Reset
Delay
10
PU Time Delay Timing
IPSlogic Functions (1 - 6)
A
D
C
B
E
F
G
PU Time Delay
Setting (30)
Figure 2-80 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram
If the IPSlogic PU Status remains dropped out (D)
after the reset delay has timed out, then the IPSlogic
PU timer value will be reset to zero (E).
If the IPSlogic PU Status reasserts (F) while the
Reset Delay Timer is still timing, then the PU Timer
Delay begins timing from the accumulated value (G).
Operation 3
31
3Operation
3.1 Front Panel Controls .................................................................. 31
3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings ................................................ 35
3.3 Setup Unit Data.......................................................................... 35
3.4 Setup System Data .................................................................... 36
3.5 Status/Metering .......................................................................... 39
3.6 Target History ........................................................................... 310
Arrow Pushbuttons
The left and right arrow pushbuttons are used to
choose among the displayed menu selections. When
entering values, the left and right arrow pushbuttons
are used to select the digit (by moving the cursor) of
the displayed setpoint that will be increased or
decreased by the use of the up and down
pushbuttons.
The up and down arrow pushbuttons increase or
decrease input values or change between upper
and lower case inputs. If the up or down pushbutton
is pressed when adjusting numerical values, the
speed of increment or decrement is increased.
EXIT Pushbutton
The EXIT pushbutton is used to exit from a displayed
screen and move up the menu tree. Any changed
setpoint in the displayed screen will not be saved if
the selection is aborted using the EXIT pushbutton.
ENTER Pushbutton
The ENTER pushbutton is used to choose a
highlighted menu selection, to replace a setpoint or
other programmable value with the currently displayed
value, or to move down within the menu tree.
Target & Status Indicators and Controls
The target/status indicators and controls consist of
the POWER SUPPLY (2) LEDs, RELAY OK LED,
the OSCILLOGRAPH TRIG LED, BREAKER
CLOSED LED, TARGET LED, DIAGNOSTIC LED
and TIME SYNC LED.
This chapter contains information that describes
the operation of the M-3931 Human Machine Interface
Module (HMI) and the M-3925A Target module. It
further describes the direct setting and configuration
procedures for entering all required data to the relay.
Included in this chapter is a description of the
process necessary for review of setpoints and timing,
monitoring function status and metering quantities,
viewing the target history, and setup of the
oscillograph recorder.
3.1 Front Panel Controls
The relay has been designed to be set and
interrogated locally with the optional HMI panel. An
integral part of this design is the layout and function
of the front panel indicators and controls, illustrated
in Figure 3-1.
Alphanumeric Display
To assist the operator in setting and interrogating
the relay locally, the HMI displays menus which
guide the operator to the desired function or setpoint
value. These menus consist of two lines. The bottom
line lists lower case abbreviations of each menu
selection with the chosen menu selection shown in
uppercase. The top menu line provides a description
of the chosen menu selection.
Screen Blanking
The display will automatically blank after exiting
from the Main Menu, or from any screen after five
(5) minutes of unattended operation. To wake up the
display, the user must press any key except EXIT.
32
Power Supply #1 (#2) LED
The green PS LED indicator will remain illuminated
for the appropriate power supply whenever power is
applied to the unit and the power supply is operating
correctly. A second power supply is available as an
option, for units without expanded I/O.
Relay OK LED
The green RELAY OK LED is controlled by the
relay's microprocessor. A flashing RELAY OK LED
indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also
be programmed to be continuously illuminated.
Oscillograph Triggered LED
The red OSC TRIG LED will illuminate to indicate
that oscillographic data has been recorded in the
units memory and is available for download.
Breaker Closed LED
The red BRKR CLOSED LED will illuminate to
indicate when the breaker status input IN1 (52b) is
open.
Target Indicators and Target Reset
When a condition exists that causes the operation
of outputs 1 through 8 (1 through 23 for units with
expanded I/O), the TARGET LED will illuminate,
indicating a relay operation. The TARGET LED will
remain illuminated until the condition causing the
trip is cleared, and the operator presses the TARGET
RESET pushbutton. For units equipped with the
optional M-3925A Target Module, additional targeting
information is available. The Target module includes
an additional 24 target LEDs, and 8 output status
LEDs. LEDs corresponding to the particular operated
function as well as the present state of the outputs
are available. Pressing and holding the TARGET
RESET pushbutton will display the present pickup
status of all functions available on the target module.
This is a valuable diagnostic tool which may be
used during commissioning and testing.
Time Sync LED
The green TIME SYNC LED will illuminate to indicate
that the IRIG-B time signal is received and the
internal clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time
signal. IRIG-B time information is used to accurately
tag target and oscillograph events.
Diagnostic LED
The diagnostic DIAG LED will flash when a self-test
error is detected. The LED will flash the Error Code
number; for example, for Error Code 32, the LED
will flash 3 times, followed by a short pause, and
then flash 2 times, followed by a long pause, then
repeat LED flash sequence. For units equipped with
the HMI, the Error Code number is also displayed
on the screen.
Accessing Screens
To prevent unauthorized access to relay functions,
the unit includes a provision for assigning access
codes. If access codes have been assigned, the
access code entry screen will be displayed after
ENTER is pressed from the default message screen.
Default Message Screens
When power is applied to the unit, the relay performs
a number of self-tests to ensure that it is operating
correctly. During the self-tests, the screen displays
an X for each test successfully executed.
If all self-tests are executed successfully, the relay
will briefly display the word PASS and then a series
of status screens that include:
Model Number
Software Version Number
Serial Number
Date and time as set in the system clock
User Logo Screen
If a test fails, an error code will be displayed and the
relay will not allow operation to proceed. In such a
case, the error code should be noted and the factory
contacted. A list of error codes and their descriptions
are provided in Appendix C, Error Codes.
When the relay has power applied and is unattended,
the user logo lines are blanked.
If a function has operated and the targets have not
been reset, the screen will display the time and date
of the operation and automatically cycle through
screens for each applicable target (see Figure 3-2).
Pressing the ENTER pushbutton will enter local
mode operation, displaying the access code entry
screen or, if access codes have been disabled, the
first level menu.
Figure 3-3 presents the software menu flow map for
HMI-equipped units. This map can be used as a
quick reference guide to aid in navigating the relay's
menus.
Operation 3
33
Power-On
Local Mode
Default Message Screens
0
5-minute
access
lockout
Trip Target Screens
Access Screens (optional)

Main Menu Flow
pwr lof fuse... VOLT curr freq v/hz
VOLTAGE RELAY
27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
PHASE_UNDER
27 #1 PICKUP
108 Volts
ENTER ACCESS CODE
LEVEL 1 ACCESS GRANTED!
ACCESS DENIED!
53rd St. Substation
TARGET
03 01
01-Jan-2003 01:05:20.000
TARGET
nutrl_under phase_over...
TARGET
27 #1 Phase Undervoltage
LED Test
XXXXXXXX
POWER ON SELFTESTS
PASS
POWER ON SELFTESTS
SERIAL NUMBER 137
01-Jan-2003 15:24:32
Power-On Self-Test
and Status Screens
Self-Tests
53rd St. Substation
Beckwith Electric Co.
Software Version
Serial Number
System Date and Time
Model Number
D - 0150V01.02.03 1269
M-3425A
User Logo
Figure 3-2 Screen Message Menu Flow
Figure 3-1 M-3425A Front Panel
34
VOLTAGE RELAY
VOLT curr freq v/hz
27 Phase Undervoltage
59 Phase Overvoltage
27TN Neutrl Undervolt
59X Overvoltage
59N Neutral Overvoltage
59D Volt. Diff. 3rd Har.
CURRENT RELAY
volt CURR freq v/Hz
46 Neg Seq Overcurrent
50 Inst Overcurrent
50/27 Inadvertent Energing
50BF Breaker Failure
50DT Def. Time Overcurr
50N Inst Overcurrent
51N Inv Time Overcurrent
49 Stator Overload
51V Inv Time Overcurrent
87 Differential Overcurr
87GD Gnd Diff Overcurr
67N Res Dir Overcurr
FREQUENCY RELAY
volt curr FREQ v/hz
81 Frequency
81R Rate of Change Freq
81A Frequency Accum.
VOLTS PER HERTZ RELAY
volt curr freq V/HZ
24 Def Time Volts/Hertz
24 Inv Time Volts/Hertz
POWER RELAY
PWR lof fuse dist
32 Directional Power
LOSS OF FIELD RELAY
pwr LOF fuse dist
40 Loss of Field
V. T. FUSE LOSS RELAY
pwr los FUSE dist
60FL V. T. Fuse Loss
PHASE DISTANCE RELAY
pwr lof fuse DIST
21 Phase Distance
78 Out of Step
FIELD GROUND RELAY
FIELD stator sync
64B/F Field Ground
STATOR GROUND RELAY
field STATOR sync
64S Stator Ground
SYNC CHECK RELAY
field stator SYNC
25S Sync Check
25D Dead Volt
BREAKER MONITOR
BRKR trpckt ipslog
Set Breaker Monitoring
Preset Accumulators
Clear Accumulators
TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR
brkr TRPCKT ipslog
Trip Circuit Monitor
IPS LOGIC
brkr trpckt IPSLOG
IPS Logic
CONFIGURE RELAY
CONFIG sys stat
Voltage Relay
Current Relay
Frequency Relay
Volts per Hertz Relay
Power Relay
Loss of Field Relay
V.T. Fuse Loss Relay
Phase Distance Relay
Field Gnd Relay
Stator Gnd Relay
Sync Check Relay
Breaker Mon Relay
Trip Ckt Mon Relay
IPSLogic Relay
SETUP SYSTEM
config SYS stat
Input Activated Profiles
Active Setpoint Profile
Copy Active Profile
Nominal Voltage
Nominal Current
V. T. Configuration
Delta-Y Transform
Phase Rotation
59/27 Magnitude Select
50DT Split-phase Diff.
Pulse Relay
Latched Outputs
Relay Seal-in Time
Active Input State
V.T. Phase Ratio
V.T. Neutral Ratio
V.T. VX Ratio
C.T. Phase Ratio
C.T. Neutral Ratio
STATUS
config sys STAT
Voltage Status
Current Status
Frequency Status
V/Hz Status
Power Status
Impedance Status
Sync Check Status
Breaker Mon Acc Status
81A Accumulators Status
In/Out Status
Timer Status
Relay Temperature
Counters
Time of Last Power Up
Error Codes
Checksums
VIEW TARGET HISTORY
TARGETS osc_rec comm
View Target History
Clear Target History
OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER
targets OSC_REC comm
View Record Status
Clear Records
Recorder Setup
COMMUNICATION
targets osc_rec COMM
COM1 Setup
COM2 Setup
COM3 Setup
Communication Address
Response Time Delay
Comm Access Code
Ethernet Setup
Ethernet IP Address
SETUP UNIT
SETUP exit
Software Version
Serial Number
Alter Access Codes
User Control Number
User Logo Line 1
User Logo Line 2
Clear Output Counters
Clear Alarm Counter
Date & Time
Clear Error Codes
Ethernet Firmware Ver.
Diagnostic Mode
EXIT LOCAL MODE
setup EXIT
NOTE: Depending on which functions are purchased, some
menus may not appear.
Figure 3-3 Main Menu Flow
Operation 3
35
3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/
Settings
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is shipped
from the factory with all functions disabled (user will
only be able to enable purchased functions).
The Setup Procedure provided below is a suggested
setup procedure for initially entering settings into
the relay. While it is written for HMI-equipped units,
the same procedure is applicable when setting the
relay through remote communication utilizing
M-3820D IPScom
Communications Software.
Following the Setup Procedure are several sections
which provide additional detail concerning the
settings required for proper commissioning.
Setup Procedure
NOTE: Configuration Record forms are available
in Appendix A, Configuration Record
Forms, to record settings for future
reference.
1. Enter the Setup Unit data. This is general
information required including altering
access codes, setting date and time,
defi ni ng user l ogos, and other
adjustments. See Section 3.3, Setup
Unit Data.
2. Configure the Setup System data. This
is the general system and equipment
information required for operation,
including such items as CT and VT ratios,
VT configuration, and Nominal values.
See Section 3.4, Setup System Data
subsection.
3. Enable the desired functions and
elements. See Section 3.4, Configure
Relay Data subsection.
4. Enter the desired setpoints for the
enabled functions. See Section 3.4,
Setpoints and Time Settings subsection.
5. Enter configuration information for the
oscillograph recorder. See Section 3.4,
Oscillograph Recorder Data subsection.
6. If remote communication is used, set
the parameters as needed. See Section
3.4, Communi cati ons Setti ngs
subsection, or in Chapter 4, Remote
Operation.
3.3 Setup Unit Data
NOTE: Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow,
for a list of submenus associated with
the SETUP UNIT menu.
To access the SETUP UNIT menu proceed as
follows:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton to display
the main menu.
2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until
SETUP UNIT is displayed on the top
line of the screen.
3. Press the ENTER pushbutton to access
the SETUP UNIT menu.
SETUP UNIT
SETUP exit
4. Press the ENTER pushbutton to move
down within the SETUP UNIT menu to
the desired category. To exit a specific
category and continue to the next menu
category, press the EXIT pushbutton.
Setup Unit Data Entry
The general information required to complete the
entry of Setup Unit Data includes:
Access Codes: The relay includes three levels of
access codes. Depending on their assigned code,
users have varying levels of access to the installed
functions.
1. Level 1 Access = Read setpoints,
monitor status, view target history.
2. Level 2 Access = All of level 1
privileges, plus read & change
setpoints, target history, set time
clock.
3. Level 3 Access = All of level 2
privileges, plus access to all
configuration functions and settings.
Each access code is a user-defined one- to four-
digit number. Access codes can only be altered by
a level 3 user.
If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the
access code feature is disabled. When access
codes are disabled, the access screens are
bypassed, and all users have full access to all the
relay menus. The relay is shipped from the factory
with the access code feature disabled.
36
User Control Number: This is a user-defined value
which can be used for inventory or identification.
The relay does not use this value, but it can be
accessed through the HMI or the communications
interface, and can be read remotely.
User Logo: The user logo is a programmable, two-
line by 24-character string, which can be used to
identify the relay, and which is displayed locally
when the relay is idle. This information is also
available remotely.
Date and Time: This screen is used to view and set
the relay's internal clock. The clock is used to time
stamp system events such as trip and oscillograph
operations.
The clock is disabled when shipped from the factory
(indicated by 80 seconds appearing on the clock)
to preserve battery life. If the relay is to be
unpowered for an extended length of time, the clock
should be stopped (see Diagnostic Mode). If the
IRIG-B interface is used, the hours, minutes, and
seconds i nformati on i n the cl ock wi l l be
synchronized with IRIG-B time information every
hour.
The relay can accept a modulated IRIG-B signal
using the rear panel BNC connector, or a
demodulated TTL level signal using extra pins on
the rear panel COM2 RS-232 interface connector
(see Figure B-4 for COM2 pinout.) If the TTL signal
is to be used, then Jumper 5 will be required to be
positioned (see Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches
and Jumpers).
Setup Unit Features That Do Not Require Data
Entry
The Setup Unit menu categories that provide the
user with read only information are Software
Version, Serial Number and Ethernet Firmware
Ver..
The Setup Unit menu also contains features that
provide the user with the ability to Clear Output
Counters, Clear Alarm Counter, Clear Error
Codes and access the Diagnostic Mode. The error
codes are described in Appendix C, Self Test Error
Codes. Note that while the relay is in Diagnostic
Mode, all protective functions are inoperative.
3.4 Setup System Data
the SETUP SYSTEM menu.
To access the SETUP SYSTEM menu proceed as
follows:
the main menu.
SETUP SYSTEM is displayed on the
top line of the screen.
the SETUP SYSTEM menu.
SETUP SYSTEM
config SYS stat
To input the data, access the menu as follows:
the main menu.
SETUP SYSTEM is displayed on the
the SETUP SYSTEM menu and begin
the data input.
System setup data is required for proper operation
of the relay. Information needed to complete this
section includes: Nominal Voltage, Nominal Current,
VT Configuration, and other system-related
information. See Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay
System Setup subsection for a more detailed
description of the settings required.
Operation 3
37
Configure Relay Data
the CONFIGURE RELAY menu.
To input the data, access the CONFIGURE RELAY
menu as follows:
the main menu.
CONFIGURE RELAY is displayed on
the top line of the screen.
3. Press ENTER to access the
CONFIGURE RELAY menu and begin
the data input.
CONFIGURE RELAY
CONFIG sys stat
input data in this section includes:
enable/disable
output choices (OUT1OUT8; for units
with expanded I/O, OUT9OUT23 may
only be set through IPScom
)
input blocking choices (IN1IN6; for units
with expanded I/O, IN7IN14 may only be
set through IPScom), plus fuse loss
blocking
Each of the purchased functions within the relay
may be individually enabled or disabled. In addition,
many functions have more than one element which
may also be enabled or disabled. Unused functions
and elements should be disabled to avoid nuisance
tripping and speed up HMI response time.
After enabling a function/element, the user is
presented with two additional screens for selection
of input blocking and output contact designations.
Any combination of the control/status inputs or the
internally generated VT fuse loss logic can be
selected to dynamically block the enabled function.
OR logic is used if more than one input is selected.
Outputs 16 (OUT9OUT23 for units with expanded
I/O, set through IPScom only) are form a contacts
(normally open) and outputs 7 and 8 are form c
contacts (center tapped a and b contacts). Output
contacts 14 contain special circuitry for high-speed
operation and pick up approximately 4 ms faster
than other contacts.
See Section 2.1, Configuration, for more information.
Setpoints and Time Settings
for a list of submenus and specific
elements associated with the Setpoints
and Time Setting menus.
To input the data, access these menus as follows:
the main menu.
VOLTAGE RELAY, the first of the
setpoint and time setting menus, is
displayed on the top line of the screen.
NOTE: Some menus are dynamic, and do not
appear if the function is not purchased
or is unavailable.
3. Press ENTER to begin the data input for
this menu, or continue pressing the right
arrow pushbutton until the desired
setpoint and time setting menu is
displayed, then press ENTER to begin
the data input.
input data in this section includes individual relay
function:
pickup settings (converted to relay
quantities)
time delay settings
frequency settings
time dials
power level settings (in percent rated)
impedance diameter in relay ohms for
distance and offset settings
Settings should be programmed based on system
analysis as described in Chapter 2, Application. A
complete description of the individual function as
well as guidelines for settings are explained therein.
38
Oscillograph Recorder Data
the OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER
menu.
To input the data, access the OSCILLOGRAPH
RECORDER menu as follows:
the main menu.
OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER i s
displayed on the top line of the screen.
the OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER menu
and begin the data input.
OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER
targets OSC_REC comm
The Oscillograph Recorder provides comprehensive
data recording (voltage, current, and status input/
output signals) for all monitored waveforms (at 16
samples per cycle). Oscillograph data can be
downloaded using the communications ports to any
IBM compatible personal computer running the
M-3820D IPScom
Communications Software. Once

downloaded, the waveform data can be examined
and printed using the optional M-3801D IPSplot
PLUS Oscillograph Data Analysis Software.

CAUTION: Oscillograph records are not retained
if power to the relay is interrupted.
input data of this section includes:
Recorder Partitions: When untriggered,
the recorder conti nuousl y records
waveform data, keeping the data in a
buffer memory. The recorder's memory
may be partitioned into 1 to 16 partitions.
When triggered, the time stamp is
recorded, and the recorder continues
recording for a user-defined period. The
snapshot of the waveform is stored in
memory for later retrieval using IPScom
Communications Software. The OSC TRIG
LED on the front panel will indicate a
recorder operation (data is available for
downloading).
Trigger Inputs and Outputs: The recorder
can be triggered remotely through serial
communi cati ons usi ng IPScom, or
automatically using programmed status
inputs or outputs.
Post-Trigger Delay: A post-trigger delay
of 5% to 95% must be specified. After
triggering, the recorder will continue to
store data for the programmed portion of
the total record before re-arming for the
next record. For example, a setting of
80% will result in a record with 20%
pretrigger data, and 80% post-trigger data.
f o r e b m u N
s n o i t i t r a P
s e l c y C f o r e b m u N
n o i t i t r a P h c a E r e p
1 s e l c y C 6 1 4
2 s e l c y C 0 8 2
3 s e l c y C 8 0 2
4 s e l c y C 8 6 1
5 s e l c y C 6 3 1
6 s e l c y C 0 2 1
7 s e l c y C 4 0 1
8 s e l c y C 8 8
9 s e l c y C 0 8
0 1 s e l c y C 2 7
1 1 s e l c y C 4 6
2 1 s e l c y C 4 6
3 1 s e l c y C 6 5
4 1 s e l c y C 6 5
5 1 s e l c y C 8 4
6 1 s e l c y C 8 4
Table 3-1 Recorder Partitions
Communications Settings
To enter the communications settings, access the
COMMUNICATION menu as follows:
the main menu.
COMMUNICATION is displayed on the
Operation 3
39
the COMMUNICATION menu and begin
the data entry.
COMMUNICATION
communications settings entry of this section
include:
Baud rate for COM1 and COM2
communication ports. The COM3 port does
not have a separate baud rate setting but
uses the setting of COM2 (or COM1: see
Section 5.5 Circuit Board Switches and
Jumpers).
Communications address is used to
access multiple relays using a multidrop
or network communication line.
Communications access code is used for
communication system security (entering
an access code of 9999 disables the
communication security).
Communication protocol and dead sync
time for COM2 and COM3.
Parity for COM2 or COM3 if MODBUS or
MODBUS over TCP/IP protocol is used.
Response Time Delay
IP Address, Net Mask and Gateway
Address are required if the ethernet port is
utilized and the network does not support
the DHCP protocol.
Detailed information concerning setup and operation
of the communication ports is described in Chapter
4, Remote Operation.
3.5 Status/Metering
Monitor Status/Metering
the STATUS menu.
To access the STATUS menu and begin monitoring,
proceed as follows:
the main menu.
STATUS is displayed on the top line of
the screen.
the STATUS menu.
STATUS
config sys STAT
NOTE: Some menus are dynamic, and do not
appear if the function is not purchased
or is unavailable.
4. Press the ENTER pushbutton to move
down within the STATUS menu to the
desired category. To exit a specific
category and continue to the next menu
category, press the EXIT pushbutton.
The menu categories for monitored values are:
Voltage Status: phase voltages, neutral
voltage, positive sequence voltage,
negative sequence voltage, zero sequence
voltage, third harmonic neutral voltage,
field ground measurement circuit, stator
low frequency injection voltage
Current Status: phase currents (ABC/
a-b-c), differential current, neutral current,
ground differential current, positive
sequence current, negative sequence
current, zero sequence current, stator low
frequency injection current
Frequency Status: frequency, rate of
change of frequency
Volts/Hz Status: volts per hertz
Power Status: real power, reactive power,
apparent power, power factor
Impedance Status: impedance (Zab, Zbc,
Zca), positive sequence impedance, field
ground resistance
Sync Check Status: 25S Sync Check
and 25D Dead Volt
BRKR Monitor
81A Accum. Status
IN/OUT Status: Status of input and output
contacts
Timer: 51V Delay Timer, 51N Delay Timer,
46IT Delay Timer, 24IT Delay Timer
Relay Temperature
Counters: output, alarm counter
Time of Last Power up
Error Codes
Checksums: setpoints, calibration, ROM
310
3.6 Target History
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay includes
the ability to store the last 32 target conditions in a
nonvolatile memory. A target is triggered whenever
an output is operated. A second function attempting
to operate an output (which is already operated) will
not trigger a new target, since no new output has
been operated or closed. If the second function
operation closes a different, unoperated output, a
new target will be triggered. A target includes:
an indication which function(s) have
operated, and timers expired (operated),
status information which indicates any
function that is timing (picked up),
individual phase element information at
the time of the trigger, if the operating
function was a three phase function,
phase currents at the time of operation
neutral current at the time of operation,
input and output status, and
a date/time tag.
When a target is triggered, the front panel TARGET
LED will light, indicating a recent event. If the
optional M-3925A Target Module is present, the
corresponding function LED will be lit. If the optional
M-3931 HMI module is available, a series of screens
will be presented, describing the most recent
operation. This information is also available remotely
by using the IPScom

Communication Software.
To access the TARGET HISTORY menu perform
the following:
the main menu.
TARGET HISTORY is displayed on the
To view Target History records proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the View Target History
Menu is selected to TRGT (upper case).
VIEW TARGET HISTORY
TRGT clear
If TRGT is not selected (Upper Case),
then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select TRGT.
2. Press ENTER, the following will be
displayed:
VIEW TARGET HISTORY
1 Target number
Detailed descriptions for each View Target
History screen are presented on the
following page.
Operation 3
311
TARGET 1
PHASE A=X B=X C=X
TARGET 1
-CURRENT STATUS-
TARGET 1
a=0.02 b=0.03 c=0.04
TARGET 1
N=0.50 AMPS
This display gives the phase pickup information for the specific
function.
This screen displays the phase current at the time the target
operated.
This screen displays the neutral current at the time the target
operated.
VIEW TARGET HISTORY
TRGT clear
VIEW TARGET HISTORY
1 Target number
TARGET 1
01-JAN-2001 12:27:35.125
TARGET 1
08 05 01
TARGET 1
I3 I1
TARGET 1
-OPERATE TARGETS-
TARGET 1
TARGET 1
PHASE A=X B= C=
TARGET 1
-PICKUP TARGETS-
TARGET 1
This screen gives access to the target history, and also allows
the user to clear the target history record from memory.
Using up and down buttons, user may select which particular
target to view from the last 24 recorded triggers.
This screen gives the date and time tag of the selected target.
This screen displays operated outputs.
This screen displays operated inputs at time of trip.
The following screens display the timed out or operate func-
tions.
This screen displays the specific function which timed out and
triggered the target.
This screen displays the phase information for the displayed
function at time out.
The following screens display the timing on picked up func-
tions when the target was recorded.
312
1
3
A
B
C
41
Remote Operation 4
4Remote Operation
4.1 Remote Operation ...................................................................... 41
4.2 Installation and Setup (IPScom
) ............................................. 48
4.3 Operation .................................................................................... 48
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering (Windows) ..................................... 422
4.5 Cautions.................................................................................... 427
4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................. 428
4.7 IPSutil
Communications Software ........................................ 429

This chapter is designed for the person or group
responsible for the remote operation and setting of
the rel ay usi ng the M-3820D IPScom
Communications Software or other means.
4.1 Remote Operation
The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay provides
three serial communication ports and one ethernet
port.
Serial Ports (RS-232)
Two serial interface ports, COM1 and COM2, are
standard 9-pin, RS-232, DTE-configured ports. The
front-panel port, COM1, can be used to locally set
and interrogate the relay using a temporary
connection to a PC or laptop computer. The second
RS-232 port, COM2, is provided at the rear of the
unit. COM2 is unavailable for communications when
the optional ethernet port is enabled. The
demodulated IRIG-B may still be used via the COM2
Port when ethernet is enabled.
The individual addressing capability of IPScom and
the relay allows multiple systems to share a direct
or modem connection when connected through
COM2 using a communications-line splitter (see
Figure 4-1). One such device enables 2 to 6 units to
share one communications line. Appendix B, Figure
B-2 illustrates a setup of RS-232 Fiber Optic network.
Serial Port (RS-485)
COM3 located on the rear terminal block of the
M-3425A is an RS-485, 2-wire connection. Appendix
B, Figure B-3 illustrates a 2-wire RS-485 network.
Individual remote addressing also allows for
communications through a serial multidrop network.
Up to 32 relays can be connected using the same
2-wire RS-485 communications line.
Optional Ethernet Port
The M-3425A when equipped with the optional
Ethernet Port can be accessed from a local network.
When the ethernet port is enabled the COM2 serial
port (RS-232) is unavailable for communications.
Although the ethernet connection speed is faster
than the RS-232 port (can be up to 10 Mbps), the
ethernet module connects internally through the
COM2 serial connection and is therefore limited to
connection speeds up to 9600 bps.
Either COM2, COM3 or Ethernet port may be used to
remotely set and interrogate the relay using a local
area network, modem or other direct serial connection.
Equipment such as RTUs, data concentrators,
modems, or computers can be interfaced for direct,
on-line, real time data acquisition and control.
Generally, all data available to the operator through
the front panel of the relay with the optional M-3931
HMI module is accessible remotely through the BECO
2200, MODBUS, BECO 2200 over TCP/IP or
MODBUS over TCP/IP data exchange protocols.
1
3
A
B
C
42
The communication protocols are used to fulfill the
following communications functions:
Real-time monitoring of line status
Downloading of recorded oscillograph data
Reconfiguration of all relay functions
Protocol documents are available directly from
Beckwi th El ectri c or from our websi te
www.beckwithelectric.com.
Direct Connection
In order for IPScom to communicate with the relay
using direct serial connection, a serial null modem
cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P) for
the system, and an applicable connector for the
computer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for a
null modem adapter are provided in Appendix B,
Communications.
An optional 10 foot null modem cable (M-0423) is
available from the factory, for direct connection
between a PC and the relays front panel COM port,
or the rear COM2 port.
When fabricating communication cables, every effort
should be made to keep cabling as short as possible.
Low capacitance cable is recommended. The RS-232
standard specifies a maximum cable length of 50
feet for RS-232 connections. If over 50 feet of cable
length is required, other technologies should be
investigated.
Other communication topologies are possible using
the M-3425A Generator Protection Relay. An
Application Note, Serial Communication with
Beckwith Electrics Integrated Protection System
Relays is available from the factory or from our
website at www.beckwithelectric.com.
Communications-Line Splitter
Up to six controls
can be used with a
communications-line splitter.
Address 2
Address 4
Address 5
Address 6
Address 3
Address 1
IBM-Compatible PC
Integrated Protection
System
Null Modem Cable for
Direct RS-232 Connection
Master Port
Figure 4-1 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line Splitter
1
3
A
B
C
43
Remote Operation 4
Communication Access Code: If additional link
security is desired, a communication access code
can be programmed. Like the user access codes, if
the communication access code is set to 9999
(default), communication security is disabled.
Individual relay communication addresses should
be between 1 and 200. The dead sync time, while
not critical for most communication networks, should
be programmed to match the communications
channels baud rate (see Table 4-1, below).
e t a R d u a B e m i T c n y S - d a e D
0 0 6 9 s m 4
0 0 8 4 s m 8
0 0 4 2 s m 6 1
0 0 2 1 s m 2 3
Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time
Ethernet Communication Settings
The RJ45 ethernet port can be enabled utilizing
either IPSutil from the Ethernet Settings menu or
from the HMI Communication menu. When the
ethernet port is enabled the COM2 Serial Port is not
available for communications. The demodulated
IRIG-B may still be used via the COM2 Port when
ethernet is enabled.
The following parameters must be set for proper
ethernet communication:
DHCP Protocol
ENABLE: If the network server supports the DHCP
protocol the network server will assign the IP
Address, Net Mask and Gateway Address.
DISABLE: If the network server does not support
the DHCP protocol or the user chooses to manually
input ethernet settings, then obtain the IP Address,
Net Mask and Gateway address from the Network
Administrator and enter the settings.
ETHERNET Protocols
SERCONV:To utilize the BECO2200 protocol over
a TCP/IP connection select the SERCONV
(BECO2200 TCP/IP) protocol. The IP Address of
the relay must be entered in the IPScom
Communication screen. Also, ensure that the COM2
protocol is selected to BECO2200 and the baud
rate is set to 9600 bps.
Setting Up the M-3425A Generator Protection
Relay for Communication
The initial setup of the relay for communication
must be completed by utilizing the optional M-3931
HMI Module or using direct serial connection.
For units shipped without the optional HMI Module,
the communication parameters may be altered by
first establishing communication using the default
parameters and the IPSutil program.
IPSutil is an auxiliary program shipped on the same
disk with the IPScom
program. It is used exclusively

for altering communication and setup parameters on
units shipped without the M-3931 HMI Module.
Serial Communication Settings
The following parameters must be set for proper
serial communication:
COM1 Baud Rate: Standard baud rates from 300 to
9600 are available.
COM2 Baud Rate: Standard baud rates from 300 to
9600 are available. COM2 and COM3 share the
same baud rate (see Section 5.5, Circuit Board
Switches and Jumpers).
COM2 Dead Sync Time: This delay establishes
the line idle time to re-sync packet communication.
Dead sync time should be programmed based on
the channels baud rate.
COM2 Protocol: BECO 2200 or MODBUS protocol
is supported on COM2.
COM2 Parity: None, odd or even parity is available
if MODBUS protocol is selected.
COM2 Stop Bits: One or two stop bits available if
MODBUS protocol is selected.
COM3 Dead Sync Time: This delay establishes
the line idle time to re-sync packet communication.
Dead sync time should be programmed based on
the channels baud rate.
COM3 Protocol: BECO 2200 or MODBUS protocol
is supported on COM3.
COM3 Parity: None, odd or even parity is available
if MODBUS protocol is selected.
COM3 Stop Bits: One or two stop bits available if
MODBUS protocol is selected.
Communications Address: For multidrop networks,
each device must have a unique address.
Response Time Delay: The extra time delay may
be added while the relay is sending the response. If
set to 0, the response of the relay will be equal to
the time required to process the incoming packet
(usually 2080 ms.)
1
3
A
B
C
44
6. Ensure that TCP is selected (Upper Case).
If TCP is not selected (Upper Case), then
use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to
select TCP.
displayed:
DHCP PROTOCOL
DISABLE enable
8. If the network does not support the DHCP
protocol, then go to Manual Configuration
of Ethernet Board (following page) to
manually configure the ethernet board.
9. If the DHCP Protocol is to be enabled, then
use the Right/Left arrow pushbutton to select
ENABLE (Upper Case), then press ENTER,
the following will be displayed:
TCP/IP SETTINGS
TCP prot
10. Ensure that PROT is selected (Upper Case).
If PROT is not selected (Upper Case), then
use the Right arrow pushbutton to select
PROT.
displayed:
SELECT PROTOCOL
modbus serconv
12. Use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to
select the desired protocol (Upper Case),
then press ENTER, the following will be
displayed:
TCP/IP SETTINGS
tcp PROT
13. Press EXIT, the ethernet board will
reconfigure and the following will be
displayed:
CONFIGURING ETH...
If the ethernet board successfully obtains
an IP Address the following will be displayed
for approximately 2 seconds:
ETHERNET IP ADDRESS
XX.XX.XX.XX
The ethernet board is now configured for
use and may be accessed through a
network.
The Standard Port Number for the BECO2200 over
TCP/IP protocol is 8800. The master device may
require the entry of the Standard Port Number.
MODBUS:To utilize the MODBUS protocol over a
TCP/IP connection select the MODBUS (MODBUS
over TCP/IP) protocol. The IP Address of the relay
must be entered in the IPScom
Communication
screen. Also, ensure that the COM2 protocol is
selected to MODBUS, baud rate is set to 9600 bps,
1 stop bit and no parity selected.
The Standard Port Number for the MODBUS over
TCP/IP protocol is 502. The master device may
require the entry of the Standard Port Number.
Ethernet Port Setup
Enabling the ethernet port and selecting the required
support settings can be accomplished using either
the HMI or IPSutil. Both methods are presented
below.
HMI Ethernet Port Setup
1. Ensure that the Communication Menu is
selected to COMM (upper case).
COMMUNICATION
If COMM is not selected (Upper Case),
then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons
to select COMM.
displayed:
COM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr
3. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select
ETH (Upper Case).
ETHERNET SETUP
access ETH eth_ip
displayed:
ETHERNET
DISABLE enable
5. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select
ENABLE (Upper Case), then press ENTER,
the following will be displayed:
TCP/IP SETTINGS
TCP prot
1
3
A
B
C
45
Remote Operation 4
8. Use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to
select the desired protocol (Upper Case),
then press ENTER, the following will be
displayed:
TCP/IP SETTINGS
tcp PROT
9. Press EXIT, the ethernet board will
reconfigure and the following will be
displayed:
CONFIGURING ETH...
If the ethernet board is successfully
configured, then the entered IP Address
will be displayed for approximately 2
seconds:
ETHERNET IP ADDRESS
XX.XX.XX.XX
The ethernet board is now configured for
use and may be accessed through a
network.
IPSutil
TM
Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP
1. Connect the appropriate RS232 cable from
the PC hosting IPSutil to the target relay.
2. Launch IPSutil, then select Ethernet from
the menu bar. IPSutil will display the Ethernet
Settings screen Figure 4-43.
3. From the Ethernet Settings screen select
Ethernet Enable.
4. Select DHCP Protocol Enable.
5. Select the desired protocol.
6. Select Save, IPSutil will respond with the
Advance Setup dialog box stating It will
take about 15 seconds to reset Ethernet
board to allow the menu of the unit to
reflect the change.
7. Select OK, IPSutil will configure the ethernet
board, then close the Ethernet Settings
screen. The ethernet board i s now
configured for use and may be accessed
through a network.
IPSutil
TM
Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP
1. Connect the appropriate RS232 cable from
the PC hosting IPSutil to the target relay.
2. Launch IPSutil, then select Ethernet from
the menu bar. IPSutil will display the Ethernet
Settings screen Figure 4-43.
Then the display will return to the following:
ETHERNET SETUP
access ETH eth_ip
If the ethernet board fails to obtain an IP
Address within 15 seconds the following
will be displayed (for approximately 2
seconds):
CONFIGURING ETH...
ETH BOARD ERROR
Contact the Network Administrator to
determine the cause of the configuration
failure.
Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board
1. Ensure that DISABLE is selected (Upper
Case).
If DISABLE is not selected (Upper Case),
then use the Left arrow pushbutton to select
DISABLE.
displayed:
IP ADDRESS
XX.XX.XX.XX
3. Enter the desired IP Address, then press
ENTER, the following will be displayed:
NET MASK
XX.XX.XX.XX
4. Enter the desired Net Mask, then press
GATEWAY
XX.XX.XX.XX
5. Enter the desired Gateway, then press
TCP/IP SETTINGS
tcp prot
6. Ensure that PROT is selected (Upper Case).
If PROT is not selected (Upper Case), then
use the Right arrow pushbutton to select
PROT.
displayed:
SELECT PROTOCOL
modbus serconv
1
3
A
B
C
46
Figure 4-2 IPScom
Menu Selections
NOTE: Greyed-out menu items are for future release, and are not currently available.
Comm
Window
New
Open...
Close
Save
Save As...
Print
Printer Setup
Print Summary
Exit Alt+F4
Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
Close All
Choosing the Comm menu sends you
directly to the Communication dialog box.
Help
Contents
Using Help
About...
Profile Info
Help Comm File Relay Window
IPScom
User Logo Lines
/ Unit Identifier
Unit Address
Relay Type
File
Setup System
Setpoints
Set Date/Time
Display
Reset LED
Clear History
A:1 M-3425
Primary Status
Secondary Status
Accumulator Status
Phase Distance
Loss of Field
Out of Step
Phasor Diagram
Sync Scope
Function Status
Switching Method
Active Profile
Copy Profile
Setup
Retrieve
Trigger
Clear
Relay
Setup
Retrieve
View
Clear
1
3
A
B
C
47
Remote Operation 4
3. From the Ethernet Settings screen select
Ethernet Enable.
4. Select DHCP Protocol Disable.
5. Enter values for IP Address, Net Mask and
Gateway.
6. Select the desired protocol.
7. Select Save, IPSutil will respond with the
Advance Setup dialog box stating It will
take about 15 seconds to reset Ethernet
board to allow the menu of the unit to
reflect the change.
8. Select OK, IPSutil will configure the ethernet
board, then close the Ethernet Settings
screen. The ethernet board i s now
configured for use and may be accessed
through a network.
Installing the Modems
Using IPScom to interrogate, set or monitor the
relay using a modem requires both a remote modem
connected at the relay location and a local modem
connected to the computer with IPScom installed.
In order to use IPScom to communicate with the
relay using a modem, the following must be provided
with the unit:
An external modem (1200 baud or higher),
capable of understanding standard AT
commands.
Serial modem cable with 9-pin connector
for the unit and the applicable connector
for the modem.
NOTE: Any compatible modem may be used;
however, the unit only communicates at
1200 to 9600 baud.
Similarly, the computer running IPScom must also
have access to an internal or external compatible
modem.
The local modem can be initialized, using IPScom,
by connecting the modem to the computer, and
selecting the COMM menu in IPScom. Select
MODEM, enter the required information, and finally
sel ect INITIALIZE from the expanded
Communications dialog box. The following steps
outline the initialized modem setup procedure.
1. Connecting the modem to the computer:
a. If the computer has an external modem,
use a standard straight-through RS-232
modem cable to connect the computer
and modem (M-3933). If the computer
has an internal modem, refer to the
modems instruction book to determine
which communications port should be
selected.
b. The modem must be attached to (if
external) or assigned to (if internal) the
same serial port as assigned in IPScom.
While IPScom can use any of the four
serial ports (COM1 through COM4),
most computers support only COM1
and COM2.
c. Connect the modem to the telephone
line and power up.
2. Connecting the Modem to the Relay:
Setup of the modem attached to the relay
may be slightly complicated. It involves
programming the parameters (using the AT
command set), and storing this profile in
the modems nonvolatile memory.
After programming, the modem will power
up in the proper state for communicating
with the relay. Programming may be
accomplished by using Hyperterminal or
other terminal software. Refer to your modem
manual for further information.
NOTE: The relay does not issue or understand
any modem commands. It will not adjust
the baud rate and should be considered
a dumb peripheral. It communicates
with 1 start, 8 data, and 1 stop bit.
a. Connect the unit to an external modem
by attaching a standard RS-232 modem
cabl e to the appropri ate seri al
communications port on both the unit
and the modem.
b. Connect the modem to the telephone
line and power up.
The modem attached to the unit must have the
following AT command configuration:
E0 No Echo
Q1 Dont return result code
&D3 On to OFF DTR, hang-up and reset
&S0 DSR always on
&C1 DCD ON when detected
S0=2 Answer on second ring
The following commands may also be required at
the modem:
&Q6 Constant DTE to DCE
N0 Answer only at specified speed
W Disable serial data rate adjust
\Q3 Bi-directional RTS/CTS relay
&B1 Fixed serial port rate
S37 Desired line connection speed
There are some variations in the AT commands
supported by modem manufacturers. Refer to the
hardware user documentation for a list of supported
AT commands and direction on issuing these
commands.
1
3
A
B
C
48
4.2 Installation and Setup (IPScom)
IPScom runs with the Microsoft Windows

95
operating system or later. IPScom
only supports
communication using the BECO 2200 protocol.
IPScom is available on CD-ROM, or it my be
downl oaded from our websi te at
www.beckwithelectric.com
The M-3820D IPScom Communications Software
package is not copy-protected and can be copied to
a hard disk. For more information on your specific
rights and responsibilities, see the licensing
agreement enclosed with your software or contact
Beckwith Electric.
Hardware Requirements
IPScom will run on any IBM PC-compatible computer
that provides at least the following:
8 MB of RAM
Microsoft Windows 95 or later
CD-ROM drive
one serial (RS-232) communication port
pointing device (mouse)
Installing IPScom
1. Insert software CD-ROM into your drive.
An Auto-Install program will establish a
program folder (Becoware) and subdirectory
(IPScom). After installation, the IPScom
program item icon (see Figure 4-3) is
located in Becoware. The default location
for the application files is on drive C:, in the
new subdi rectory IPScom
(C:\Becoware\Ipscom).
2. If the Auto-Install program does not launch
when the CD-ROM is inserted into the drive
then proceed as follows:
a. Select Run from the Start Menu.
b. In the Run dialog box, locate the
installation file contained on the
installation disk
(sfi_m3425Acom_V______.exe).
c. Select Run to start the installation
process.
Figure 4-3 IPScom Program Icon
Installing IPSutil
IPSutil is utility software used to program system-
level parameters for units shipped without the M-3931
HMI Module. The IPSutil.exe file is automatically
installed in the Becoware folder, along with the
IPScom files, and does not require separate
installation.
4.3 Operation
Activating Communications
After the relay has been set up, the modems
initialized, and IPScom installed, communication is
activated as follows:
1. Choose the IPScom i con from the
Becoware folder.
2. The IPScom splash screen is displayed
briefly, providing the software version
number and copyright information. This
information is also available by choosing
the About... command from the Help menu.
3. Choose the COMM menu selection.
Complete the appropriate information on
the window for the relay to be addressed.
a. If communication is through a modem,
choose the Modem command button
to expand the communications dialog
box. Choose the desired relay location
and choose Dial button. This action
establishes contact and automatically
opens communication to the relay.
b. If computer is connected through the
front port, choose the Open COM
button. Thi s acti on establ i shes
communications.
4. Enter any valid IPScom command(s) as
desired.
5. To end communi cati on when
communicating by modem, choose the Hang
Up command button from the expanded
Communication dialog box. To close the
communication channel when connected
locally, choose the Close COM command
button.
Overview
When IPScom
is run, a menu and status bar is

displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2. This section
describes each IPScom menu selection and explains
each IPScom command in the same order as they
are displayed in the software program. For detailed
information regarding each dialog box field (function),
refer to Chapter 2, Application.
1
3
A
B
C
49
Remote Operation 4
When starting IPScom, the initial menu choices are
the File menu or the Comm menu. The choice
specifies whether the operator desires to write to a
data file or to communicate directly with the relay.
File Menu
File
New
Open...
Close
Save
Save As...
Print
Printer Setup
Exit Alt+F4
The File menu enables the user to create a new
data file, open a previously created data file, close,
print, and save the file. The IPScom program can
also be exited through the File menu.
Since IPScom can be used with several Beckwith
protection systems in addition to the M-3425A
Generator Protection Relay, the format and contents
of a file must be established depending on which
protective system is being addressed. When not
connected to one of the protection systems, using
the New command, a new file is established with
the System Type dialog box (see Figure 4-4). Choices
for Unit Type in the System Type Screen include
M-3425, M-3425A, M-3425A(SOE) and M-3425A
Expanded I/O. The selected Unit Type ensures that
the New file is consistant with the protective system
firmware version (Table 4-2). Choosing the OK
command button allows the new data file to be
opened. Selecting Save or Save As commands
allows the file to be named and saved.
NOTE: By choosing the NEW command, unit
and setpoint configuration values are
based on factory settings specified for
the profiled protection system.
X System Type
Unit Type: M-3425A
Nominal Frequency:
C.T. Secondary Rating:
Phase Rotation:
50 Hz 60 Hz
1 A 5 A
ABC ACB
OK
Cancel
Figure 4-4 System Type Dialog Box
Path: File menu / New command
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Allows the selected Unit Type File to be
opened.
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom main screen;
any changes to the di spl ayed
information is lost.
The Save and Save As... commands allow re-
saving a file or renaming a file, respectively. The
Open command allows opening a previously created
data file. With an opened data file, use the Relay...
Setup... menu items to access the setpoint
windows.
If communication can be established with a relay, it
is always safer to use the Read Data From Relay
command to update the PCs data file with the
relay data. This file now contains the proper system
type information, eliminating the need to set the
information manually.
The Print and Printer Setup commands allow user
to select printer options and print out all setpoint
data from the data file or directly from the relay, if a
relay is communicating with the PC.
The Exit command quits the IPScom program.
Comm Menu
Help Window File Relay Comm
The Communication dialog box (see Figure 4-5)
allows setup of the IPScom communication data to
coordinate with the relay and by choosing the
Modem button, to establish contact for remote
locations. When communicating by way of a fiber
optic loop network, echo cancelling is available by
checking the Echo Cancel box. This command
masks the senders returned echo.
If the modem was not used to establ i sh
communication (direct connection), press the Open
COM button to start. If the relay has a default
communication access code of 9999, a message
window will be displayed showing Access Level #3
was granted. Otherwise, another dialog box will
appear to prompt the user to enter the access code
in order to establish the communication. Close
COM discontinues communication.
Protective System Unit Type Firmware Version
M-3425 D-0070XXX.XX.XX
M-3425A D-0114XXX.XX.XX
M-3425A (SOE) D-0150XXX.XX.XX
M-3425A Expanded I/O D-0150XXX.XX.XX
Table 4-2 Protective System Firmware
Association
1
3
A
B
C
410
X Communication
Open COM
Close COM
Modem
Cancel
Add
Edit
Delete
Save
Modem
Bring up terminal window after dialing
Phone Number:
PC Port
COM1
Baud Rate
1200
4800
2400
9600
Echo Cancel
Access Code
Relay
Address
Open TCP_IP
Close TCP_IP
TCP IP ADDRESS:
Initialize Dial Hang Up
TCP IP
Figure 4-5 Communication Dialog Box
Path: Comm menu
COMMAND BUTTONS
Open COM Initiates contact withthe protecti ve
system, either by direct serial or modem
communication.
Close COM Breaks communi cati on wi th the
protective system, for both direct serial
or modem communication.
TCP_IP Opens the ethernet appl i cabl e
communication screen selections to
allow user to enter a TCP_IP address (if
necessary), and opening and closing
communication with the target relay.
Modem Displays the expanded Communication
dialog box.
Cancel Returns you to the IPScom main window;
any changes to the di spl ayed
information are lost.
Open TCP_IP Initiates contact with the protective
system by ethernet connection.
Close TCP_IP Closes Ethernet connection.
Bring Up When selected, following connection to
Terminal the target modem, allows the user to
Window send commands to the modem.
After
Dialing
Add Displays the Add/Edit dialog box,
al l owi ng you to type a protecti ve
systems unit identifier, phone number,
and communication address.
Edit Displays the Add/Edit dialog box,
allowing you to review and change the
user l i nes (uni t i denti fi er), phone
number, and communication address of
a selected entry.
Delete Deletes a selected entry.
Save Saves any changes to the displayed
information
Initialize Allows the user to send special setup or
other AT commands directly to the
modem.
Dial Dials the entry selected from the
directory.
Hang Up Ends modem communication, allowing
the user to dial again.
Relay Menu
Relay
Setup
Monitor
Target
Sequence of Events
Oscillograph
Profile
Write File to Relay
Read Data From Relay
The Relay menu provides access to the windows
used to set, monitor, or interrogate the relay. Six
submenus are provided: Setup, Monitor, Target ,
Sequence of Events, Oscillograph

and Profile
as well as two commands, Write File to Relay, and
Read Data From Relay.
Relay
Setup
Monitor
Target
Sequence of Events
Oscillograph
Profile
Write File to Relay
Setup System
Setpoints
Set Date and Time
The Setup submenu provides three commands:
Setup System, Setpoints, and Set Date/Time.
The Setup System command displays the Setup
System dialog box (Figure 4-6) allowing the input of
the pertinent information regarding the system on
which the protective relay is applied (see Section
2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup).
1
3
A
B
C
411
Remote Operation 4
SETUP SYSTEM
Note: Pulse/Latched Relay Outputs should be selected in 2 steps
i)Deselect Latched/Pulse Relay Outputs and Save
ii) Select Pulse/Latched Outputs and Save
Nominal Frequency: 60 Hz C.T. Secondary Rating: 5A
Input Active State Expanded
Save Cancel
Nominal Voltage: 120
Nominal Current: 5.00
140.0 V 50.0 V
6.00 A 0.50 A
Delta-Y Transform
Disable Delta-AB Delta-AC
Open
Cl ose
Open
Cl ose
Open
Cl ose
Open
Cl ose
Open
Cl ose
6 5 4 3 2 1
Open
Cl ose
Input Active State:
1. 0
1. 0
1. 0
10
10
V.T. Configuration:
59/27 Mag. Select:
Phase Rotation:
V.T. Phase Ratio:
V.T. Neutral Ratio:
V.T. VX Ratio
C.T. Phase Ratio:
C.T. Neutral Ratio:
Outputs: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pulse Relay
Injection Frequency for F64S: 20 Hz
Li ne t o Gr ound Li ne t o Li ne Li ne- Gr ound t o Li ne- Li ne
RMS DFT
ABC ACB
50DT
Split Phase
Differential:
Enable
Disable
Outputs:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Latched Outputs
Relay Seal-In Time
OUT 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
2
cycles
8160
cycles
8160
cycles
OUT 9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
2
cycles
OUT 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
Relay Seal-In Time Expanded
SETUP
:1
:1
:1
:1
:1
1.0
1.0
1.0
1
1
6550.0
6550.0
6550.0
65500
65500
Figure 4-6 Setup System Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setup System command
COMMAND BUTTONS
Input Active When the unit is equipped with expanded I/O, this command opens the Expanded Input Active
State State screen (Figure 4-7), to allow the selection of Expanded Inputs 7 through 14.
Expanded
Pulse/Latch When the unit is equipped with expanded I/O, this command opens the Pulse/Latch
Relay screen (Figures 4-8 and 4-9) to allow the selection of expanded outputs 9 through 23.
Expanded
Outputs
Save When connected to a protection system, sends the currently displayed information to the unit.
Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information.
main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the operated state established by
an opening rather than a closing external contact.
1
3
A
B
C
412
Expanded Input Active State
OK
Cancel
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
? X
Figure 4-7 Expanded Input Active State
? X
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
OUTPUT17
OUTPUT18
OUTPUT19
OUTPUT20
OUTPUT21
OUTPUT22
OUTPUT23
OK
Cancel
Figure 4-8 Pulse Relay Expanded Output Screen
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
OK
Cancel
? X
OUTPUT17
OUTPUT18
OUTPUT19
OUTPUT20
OUTPUT21
OUTPUT22
OUTPUT23
Figure 4-9 Latch Relay Expanded Output Screen
1
3
A
B
C
413
Remote Operation 4
The Setpoints command displays the Relay
Setpoints dialog box (see Figure 4-10) from which
the individual relay function dialog boxes can be
accessed. Choosing a Relay function button will
display the corresponding function dialog box (see
Figure 4-11 for example).
M3425A Relay Setpoints X
Configure
Exit
21
Phase Distance
24
Volts/Hz
25
Sync Check
27TN
Third Harmonic
Overvoltage
49
Stator Overload
50BF
Breaker Failure
50
Instan. Phase
Overcurr.
50N
Instan. Neutral
Overcurrent
59
Phase
Overvoltage
59D
Third Harmonic
Voltage Diff.
59N
Neutral
Overvoltage
59X
Multipurpose
Overvoltage
78
Out of Step
87
Phase Differential
Current
27
Phase
Undervoltage
32
Directional Power
40
Loss of Field
46
Neg. Seq.
Overcurrent
50DT
Definite Time
Overcurrent
50/27
Inadvertent
Energizing
51N
Inv. Time Neu.
Overcurrent
51V
Inv. Time
Overcurrent
60FL
VT Fuse-Loss
Detection
67N
Residual Dir.
Overcurrent
64S
100% Stator
Ground
64F/B
Field Ground
Protection
87GD
Ground
Differential
BM
Breaker Monitor
TC
Trip Circuit
Monitor
FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS
21 -- 51V 59 -- TC
81
Frequency
81A
Freq. Accum.
81R
ROCOF
IPS
IPS Logic
OUTPUTS 1-8
INPUTS 1-FL
Configure
OUTPUTS 9-23
INPUTS 7-14
Figure 4-10 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window
COMMAND BUTTONS
Functions Opens the All Setpoints Table dialog box
for the specified range of functions.
Configure Opens the Configure dialog box.
Exit Saves the currentl y di spl ayed
information and returns you to the
IPScom
main window.
The Relay Setpoints dialog box gives access to two
additional dialog boxes: All Setpoints Table and
Configure.
Choosing either of the Functions command buttons
(either 2151V or 59TC) displays an All Setpoints
Table dialog box for the specified range of setpoints
(see Fig. 4-13). This dialog box contains a list of
settings for each relay within a single window to
allow scrolling through all relay setpoint configuration
values. Choosing the Configure command button
displays the Configure dialog box (see Fig. 4-14),
which contains a chart of programmed input and
output contacts, in order to allow scrolling through
all relay output and blocking input configurations.
Both dialog boxes (All Setpoint Table and Configure),
feature hotspots which allows the user to jump from
a scrolling dialog box to an individual relay function
dialog box and return to the scrolling dialog box
again. All available parameters can be reviewed or
changed when jumping to a relay configuration dialog
box from either scrolling dialog box.
@: WARNING, You have not selected an output!
(46) - NEGATIVESEQUENCEOVERCURRENT
Pickup:
Time Dial:
MaximumTime:
Reset Time:
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Save Cancel
X ?
Def. Time
Inv. Time
Pickup:
Delay:
3%
1 Cycle
100%
8160 Cycles
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs @
Expanded I/Os
Expanded I/Os
3%
1
600 Cycles
1 Second
100%
95
65500 Cycles
600 Seconds
F46
Figure 4-11 Typical Setpoint Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ 46
command button OR 46 jump hotspot within All Setpoints
Table or Configure dialog box
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save When connected to a protection system,
sends the currentl y di spl ayed
information to the unit. Otherwise, saves
the currently displayed information and
returns you to the Relay Setpoints, All
Setpoints Table, or Configure dialog
box.
Cancel Returns the user to the Relay Setpoints,
All Setpoints Table, or Configure dialog
box; any changes to the displayed
Expanded When the unit is equipped with expanded
I/Os I/O, this selection allows the user to select
expanded outputs 923 and expanded
inputs 714.
OK
Cancel
Expanded Output Initiate
Expanded Input
Initiate
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
OUTPUT17
OUTPUT18
OUTPUT19
OUTPUT20
OUTPUT21
OUTPUT22
OUTPUT23
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
? X
Figure 4-12 Expanded I/O Initiate
1
3
A
B
C
414
All Setpoints Table
SETUP SYSTEM
Nominal Voltage:
Nominal Current:
Nominal Frequency:
Phase Rotation:
C.T. Secondary Rating:
59/27 Mag. Select:
Delta-Y Transform:
Latch Relay Outputs:
F64S Frequency:
V.T. Configuration:
V.T. Phase Ratio:
V.T. Neutral Ratio:
V.T. VX Ratio:
C.T. Phase Ratio:
C.T. Neutral Ratio
50DT Split Phase:
Fuse Relay Outputs:
OUT1:
OUT2:
OUT3:
OUT4:
OUT5:
OUT6:
OUT7:
OUT8:
Seal-In Time (Cycles)
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Impedance Angle:
Load Encr. Angle:
Load R Reach:
Delay:
Out of Step Delay:
Overcurrent SV:
Out of Step Block En:
Load Encr. En:
OC Supervision En:
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Impedance Angle:
Load Encr. Angle:
Load R Reach:
Delay:
Overcurrent SV:
Load Encr. En:
OC Supervision En:
Circle Diameter:
Offset:
Impedance Angle:
Load Encr. Angle:
Load R Reach:
Delay:
Overcurrent SV:
Load Encr. En:
OC Supervision En:
(21)- PHASE DISTANCE
(24)- VOLTS/HZ
Pickup #1:
Delay #1:
Pickup #2:
Delay #2:
Definite Time
Inverse Time
Pickup:
Time Dial:
Curves #:
Reset Rate:
(25)- SYNC CHECK
Ph. Ang. Window:
Upper Volt. Limit:
Lower Volt Limit:
Sync Check Delay:
Delta Voltage:
Delta Frequency:
25S Sync Check:
25S
25D
Dead Volt Limit:
Dead V1 Hot V2:
Hot V1 Dead V2:
Dead V1 Dead V2:
Dead Delay:
Input Initiate:
(27)- PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup #1:
Delay #1:
Pickup #2:
Delay #2:
Pickup:
Pos. Seq. Volt. Block:
Lead VAR Block:
(27TN)- UNDERVOLTAGE, NEUTRAL
Pickup:
Pos. Seq. Volt. Block:
Lead VAR Block:
X
Seal-In Time Expanded
OUT9-15:
Figure 4-13 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box (partial)
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Display All command button
JUMP HOTSPOTS
This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay dialog box and
the Setup Relay dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the All Setpoints Table dialog box.
CONTROL MENU
Close Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box.
Move Allows you to reposition the dialog box.
1
3
A
B
C
415
Remote Operation 4
Sync
Dead
#1
#2
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
VC#1
VC#2
Def. Time
Inv. Time
#1
#2
#1
#2
Def. Time #1
Def. Time #2
Inverse Time
X Configure
O U T P U T S
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Blocking Inputs
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
25
24
21
#1
#2
#3
27TN
27
32
40
50BF
46
50DT
50N
50
Figure 4-14 Configure Dialog Box (partial)
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Configure command button
JUMP HOTSPOTS
This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay dialog box.
Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the Configure dialog box.
CONTROL MENU
1
3
A
B
C
416
Sync
Dead
#1
#2
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
VC#1
VC#2
Def. Time
Inv. Time
#1
#2
#1
#2
Def. Time #1
Def. Time #2
Inverse Time
Configure
E x p a n d e d O U T P U T S
23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Expanded Blocking Inputs
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
25
24
21
#1
#2
#3
27TN
27
32
40
50BF
46
50DT
50N
50
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
X
Figure 4-15 Configure Dialog Partial (Shown with Expanded Input/Outputs)
Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Configure command button
JUMP HOTSPOTS
This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay dialog box.
Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the Configure dialog box.
CONTROL MENU
1
3
A
B
C
417
Remote Operation 4
The Set Date/Time command (see Figure 4-16)
allows the system date and time to be set, or
system clock to be stopped. This dialog box also
displays an LED mimic to identify when the Time
Sync is in use (preventing date/time from being
changed by user).
Figure 4-16 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu/ Setup submenu/ Set Date/Time
Command
There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic in this dialog
box (the LED is displayed as different shading on a
monochrome monitor). When this LED is blue, the
relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal and the
Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field
cant be changed. But the Date field can be changed
(by editing and pressing Save).
When the LED is not blue, the relay is not time-
synchronized and therefore, both the Date and Time
fields can be changed.
The time field in the dialog box is not updated
continuously. The time at which the dialog box was
opened is the time that is displayed and remains as
such. This is true whether the relay is synchronized
with the IRIG-B signal or not.
COMMAND BUTTONS
Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop, the relay
clock. Stop pauses, Start resumes.
Save Saves Time and Date settings to the
relay when applicable.
main
window. Any changes to the displayed
information is lost.
The Monitor submenu provides access for reviewing
the present status of the relay's measured and
calculated values, other real-time parameters and
conditions as well as examining real-time and
historical demand metering information (see Section
4.4, Checkout Status/Metering). A cascading menu
appears, providing several command options as
shown below.
NOTE: Displayed parameters in status screens
will vary depending on unit configuration.
Primary Status
Secondary Status
Accumulator Status
Phase Distance
Loss of Field
Out of Step
Phasor Diagram
Sync Scope
Function Status
Relay
Setup
Monitor
Target
Sequence of Events
Oscillograph
Profile
Write File to Relay
The Targets submenu provides three command
options: Display, Reset LED, and Clear History.
The Display command displays the Target Dialog.
This dialog box (see Figure 4-17) provides detailed
data on target events, including time, date, function
status, phase current values, and IN/OUT contact
status at the time of trip. Individually recorded
events may be selected within the dialog box and
saved into a text file, or be printed out with optional
added comments. The Reset LED is similar to
pushing the Target Reset button on the relays front
panel, resetting current target(s) displayed on the
relay. This command does not reset any target
history.
Relay
Setup
Monitor
Target
Sequence of Events
Oscillograph
Profile
Write File to Relay
Display
Reset LED
Clear History
The Clear History command clears all stored target
data.
1
3
A
B
C
418
Target
Inputs:
Expanded Inputs:
Outputs:
Expanded Outputs
Currents:
X
Function # Status
6 5 4 3 2 1 FL
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 14
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Phase a Phase b Phase c Phase N
-326.99 A -326.99 A -326.99 A 109.90 mA
Target List
01. 01-Jan-2000 01:01:80.000
02. 01-Jan-2000 01:01:80.000
03. 01-Jan-2000 01:01:80.000
04. 01-Jan-2000 01:01:80.000
X
Close Save Print Comment
Figure 4-17 Target Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Targets submenu / Display window
Time is displayed in milliseconds.
COMMAND BUTTONS
Comment Opens comment dialog box for annotation.
Print Prints out selected target information, with comment.
Save Saves selected target information, with comment, as a text file.
Close Exits the currently displayed dialog box.
Sequence of Events
The Sequence of Events function provides a time
stamped history of the Pickup (PU), Trip (TR) or
Dropout (DR) for each element, input or output
selected in the Event Trigger Setup screen.
During each event the voltage, current, impedance,
frequency, input and output status and Volts/Hz are
recorded. Up to 512 events are logged before the
buffer begins to write over the oldest event. If multiple
events occur, then the log entries are recorded with
one millisecond resolution within each event.
Relay
Setup
Monitor
Target
Sequence of Events
Oscillograph
Profile
Write File to Relay
Setup
Retrieve
View
Clear
The Sequence of Events submenu allows the user
to Setup the events that trigger the Sequence of
Events recorder, Retrieve events from the relay,
View the pararmeters captured at the time of the
event and Clear the event recorder.
The Setup menu item displays the Event Trigger
Setup screen Figure 4-18. Protective function Pickup,
Trip, Dropout and/or Output/Input Pickup or Dropout
are selected to trigger the Sequence of Events
Recorder.
The Retrieve command downloads the events from
the currently connected relay (events must be
retrieved from the relay and stored in a file in order to
view them.)
View permits the user to see a detailed list of past
events and their corresponding captured parameters
(real power, reactive power, differential current, delta
voltage, delta frequency, phase angle, 59D ratio, V
brush (64B), field insulation resistance (64F), Vstator
(20 Hz), and Istator (20 Hz) which are displayed in
the Event Log Viewer screen Figure 4-19.
The event log viewer screen includes the commands
Open, Close, Print Summary, and Print Detail.
Open opens a saved sequence of events file. Close
closes the print file. Print Summary prints an event
summary, and Print Detail prints the detailed event
report. Clear deletes event history from the control.
1
3
A
B
C
419
Remote Operation 4
NOTE: When in File Mode, selecting Send will result in a warning message stating, To send settings,
IPScom needs to be connected to relay.
Event Trigger Setup X
o input7
o input8
o input9
o input10
o input11
o input12
o input13
o input14
o output9
o output10
o output11
o output13
o output14
o output15
o output16
o output17
o output18
o output19
o output20
o output21
o output22
o output23
o input7
o input8
o input9
o input10
o input11
o input12
o input13
o input14
o output9
o output10
o output11
o output13
o output14
o output15
o output16
o output17
o output18
o output19
o output20
o output21
o output22
o output23
Pickup Drop
Outputs Inputs
PU
DR
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
PU
DR
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Send Cancel
Expanded IO<<
PU TR DR PU TR DR PU TR DR PU TR DR PU TR DR
o o o F21 #1
o o o F21 #2
o o o F21 #3
o o o F24DT #1
o o o F24DT #2
o o o F24IT
o o o F25S
o o o F25D
o o o F27 #1
o o o F27 #2
o o o F27 #3
o o o F27TN #1
o o o F27TN #2
o o o F32 #1
o o o F32 #2
o o o F32 #3
o o o F40 #1
o o o F40 #2
o o o F40VC #1
o o o F40VC #2
o o o F46DT
o o o F46IT
o o o F49 #1
o o o F49 #2
o o o F50 #1
o o o F50 #2
o o o F50/27
o o o F50BF
o o o F50DT #1
o o o F50DT #2
o o o F50N
o o o F51N
o o o F51V
o o o F59 #1
o o o F59 #2
o o o F59 #3
o o o F59D
o o o F59N #1
o o o F59N #2
o o o F59N #3
o o o F59X #1
o o o F59X #2
o o o F60FL
o o o F64B
o o o F64F #1
o o o F64F #2
o o o F64S
o o o F67NDT
o o o F67NIT
o o o F78
o o o F81 #1
o o o F81 #2
o o o F81 #3
o o o F81 #4
o o o F81A #1
o o o F81A #2
o o o F81A #3
o o o F81A #4
o o o F81A #5
o o o F81A #6
o o o F81r #1
o o o F81R #2
o o o F87 #1
o o o F87 #2
o o o F87GD
o o o FBM
o o o FTC
o o o IPSL #1
o o o IPSL #2
o o o IPSL #3
o o o IPSL #4
o o o IPSL #5
o o o IPSL #6
Note: PU -- Pickup TR -- Trip DR -- Drop
Functions
Elements trigger on Trip, Drop Out and Pickup
I/O triggers on Pickup, Drop Out
Figure 4-18 Trigger Events Screen with Expanded I/O
Event Log Viewer X
Open Close Print Summary
No. Event Summary
Print Detail
Event Record 1
Voltages (V)
Currents (A)
Input
Output
VA 99.9 VB 120.5 VC 119.9
VN 119.7 VX 119.7 3rdH 1.63
VPS 113.3 VNS 6.7 VZS 6.7
IA 0. 996 IB 1.005 IC 0.997
Ia 0. 994 Ib 1.003 Ic 0.997
IPS 0.996 INS 0.002 IN 0.997
Rab 110.68 Xab 5.04
Impedance (Ohm)
Rbc 120.18 Xbc -0.76
Rca 110.48 Xca -6.62
Others
V/Hz (%) 99.9
Frequency (Hz) 99.9
Current Profile 1
Items Value Unit
Real Power 0.97 W
Reactive Power -0.007 Var
IZS 0.003 A
Ia diff 1.01 A
Ib diff 1.01 A
Ic diff 1.01 A
Delta V 0.1 V
Delta F 0.000 Hz
PU
DR
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Expanded
IO >>
PU
DR
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
1 09/01/2004, 15:01:33.007
F27 #1: Pickup [A ]/Trip [A ]
2 09/01/2004, 15:02:55.507
3 09/01/2004, 15:02:55.615
F32 #1: Pickup/Trip
4 09/01/2004, 15:05:03.624
F21 #2: Pickup
F32 #1: Pickup/Trip
F21 #3: Pickup [A C]
F50 #2: Pickup ]A ]/Trip [A ]
Pickup, Dropout, Trip Event #, Date, Time
Voltages, Currents and I/O Status
Impedance, Sync Information
Figure 4-19 Event Log Viewer
1
3
A
B
C
420
Events Download X
Event Record
Total Event Number:
Cancel
Download
Figure 4-20 Event Download Screen
Relay
Setup
Retrieve
Trigger
Clear
Setup
Monitor
Target
Sequence of Events
Oscillograph
Profile
Write File to Relay
The Oscillograph submenu allows storing data on
selected parameters for review and plotting at a
later time. The Setup command allows the user to
set the number of partitions and triggering
designations to be made (see Table 3-1, Recorder
Particitions). The Retrieve command downloads
and stores collected data to a file; Trigger allows
the manual triggering of the recorder; Clear erases
the existing records. Run the optional M-3801D
IPSplot
PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Software

program to view the downloaded oscillograph files.
NOTE: Oscillograph Post Trigger Delay is set
to 5% in File Mode.
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Setup Oscillograph Recorder
Number of Records
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Post Trigger
Delay 0 %
6 5 4
3 2 1
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
14 13 12 11
10 9 8 7
Trigger Outputs
Trigger Outputs Expanded Trigger Inputs Expanded
Trigger Inputs
Send
Cancel
NOTE: When in File Mode, selecting Send
will result in a warning message stating,
To send settings, IPScom needs to be
connected to relay.
Figure 4-21 Setup Oscillograph Recorder
File Format: Beco (.OSC) COMTRADE (Binary.cfg, .dat)
Retrieve Oscillograph Record X
Retrieve Cancel
Record #1: Cleared
Record #2: Cleared
Record #3: Cleared
Record #4: Cleared
Record #5: Cleared
Record #6: Cleared
Record #7: Cleared
Record #8: Cleared
Record #9: Cleared
Record #10: Cleared
Record #11: Cleared
Record #12: Cleared
Record #13: Cleared
Record #14: Cleared
Record #15: Cleared
Record #16: Cleared
Figure 4-22 Retrieve Oscillograph Record
Dialog
Relay
Setup
Monitor
Target
Sequence of Events
Oscillograph
Profile
Write File to Relay
Switching Method
Active Profile
Copy Profile
The Profile submenu provides three command
options: Switching Method, Active Profile, and
Copy Profile.
Switching Method command allows selection of
either Manual or Input contact. Active Profile allows
user to designate active profile. Copy Profile copies
active profile to one of four profiles (user should
allow approximately 2 minutes for copying.)
CAUTION: Switching the active profile when the
relay is on-line may cause unexpected operation if
the wrong profile is selected.
? X Profile Switching Method
Manual Input Contact
Active Profile
P1 P2 P3 P4
OK Cancel
NOTE: When in File Mode selecting OK to
change Profile Switching Method will
result in a warning message, To change
Profile Switching Method, IPScom needs
to be connected to relay.
Figure 4-23 Profile Switching Method Dialog
NOTE: During Profile Switching, relay operation
is disabled for approximately 1 second.
1
3
A
B
C
421
Remote Operation 4
? X Select Active Profile
Active Profile
P1 P2 P3 P4
OK Cancel
NOTE: When in File Mode selecting OK to select
the Active Profile will result in a warning
message, To select the Active Profile,
IPScom needs to be connected to Relay.
Figure 4-24 Select Active Profile
? X Copy Active Profile
Copy Active Profile to:
P1 P2 P3 P4
OK Cancel
NOTE: When in File Mode selecting OK to
copy the Active Profile will result in a
warning message, To copy the Active
Profile, IPScom needs to be connected
to Relay.
Figure 4-25 Copy Active Profile
The Write File To Relay command is used to write
the data to the relay. The Read Data From Relay
command is used to retrieve the data from the relay
to the computer for display.
Relay
Setup
Monitor
Target
Sequence of Events
Oscillograph
Profile
Write File to Relay
Window Menu/Help Menu
The Window menu enables the positioning and
arrangement of all IPScom
windows so that there is

better access to available functions. This feature
allows the display of several windows at the same
time. Clicking on an inactive window activates that
window.
Currently in revision, the Help menu will enable the
user to look up information about any IPScom menus
or commands. Though displaying (greyed-out) Help
commands, this menu item is currently unavailable.
Help
Contents
About...
Profile Info
The Help menu provides three commands. The
Contents command initiates a link to a PDF (Portable
Document File) version of this instruction book for
easy reference. An Adobe Acrobat
reader is
required to view this document.
The M-3425A Instruction Book has been indexed to
its table of contents. By selecting the Navigator
pane in Adobe Acrobat Reader, the user can directly
access selected topics. The About command
displays IPScom version and development
information. Profile Info displays user infromation
for input and editing.
X About IPScom
OK IPScoms
Integrated Protection System
Version: D-0133V02.00.15
Copyright 1997-2002 Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
ID M-3425A
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO
M-3425A
Serial Number 1
Software Version V02.00.22
Communication Address 1
Control Number 1
Setpoint Checksum 13
Calibration Checksum 3E
Unit Information
Figure 4-26 About IPScom Dialog Box
1
3
A
B
C
422
4.4 Checkout Status/Metering
Primary Status X -
CURRENT
0.0
Phase c
0.0
Phase a
0.0
Phase b
0.0
Phase A
0.0
Phase C
0.0
Phase B
0.0
Neutral
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
0.000
Zero Seq.
0.000
Neg. Seq.
0.000
Pos. Seq.
(A)
(A) (A)
FREQUENCY
DISABLED
Hz
V/HZ
0.0
%
ROCOF
DISABLED
Hz/S
POWER
0.00
Real
0.00
Reactive
0.00
Apparent
0.00 LAG
Power Factor (W) (W) (va)
BREAKER
CLOSED
0.00
VX
(v)
0.00
3rd Harm
(v)
0.00
Zero Seq
(v)
0.00
Phase A
(v)
0.00
Phase B
(v)
0.00
Phase C
(v)
0.00
Neutral
(v)
0.00
Pos Seq
(v)
0.00
Neg Seq
(v)
INPUTS
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
EXPANDED OUTPUTS
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
EXPANDED INPUTS
13 12 11 10 9 8 7
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 14
Figure 4-27 Primary Status Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu/ Monitor submenu/ Primary Status window
These are calculated values based on the VT and CT inputs.
BREAKER
CLOSED
Secondary Status
VOLTAGE
X -
0.00
Phase B
0.00
Phase C
0.00
Neg Seq
0.00
Zero Seq
FREQUENCY
DISABLED
V/HZ
0.0
% Hz
0.0
VN (3rd)
0.0
V0 (3rd)
0.0
3V0/VN
CURRENT
0.000
Zero Seq.
0.000
Low F. Inj (mA)
0.000
Pos. Seq.
0.000
Neg. Seq.
0.000
Phase A
0.000
Phase C
0.000
Phase B
0.000
Neutral
ROCOF
DISABLED
Hz/S
VOLTAGE
0.00
Phase A
0.00
Neutral
0.00
Pos Seq
0.00
Low F Inj.
POWER
0.0000
Real (p.u.)
0.0000
Reactive (p.u.)
0.0000
Apparent (p.u.)
0.0000
Factor
IMPEDANCE
R X 0.00 0.00
Phase AB
R X 0.00 0.00
Phase BC
R X 0.00 0.00
Phase CA
R X 0.00 0.00
Pos Seq Field Insulation
<5 k ohm R
0.00
VX
0.0
Brush (mV)
0.000
Phase a
0.000
Phase b
0.000
Phase c
0.000
A-a diff
0.000
B-b diff
0.000
C-c diff
0.000
I diff G
0.000
49#1
0.000
49#2
INPUTS
FL 6 5 4 3 2 1
EXPANDED OUTPUTS
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
EXPANDED INPUTS
13 12 11 10 9 8 7
OUTPUTS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 14
Figure 4-28 Secondary Status Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu/ Monitor submenu/ Secondary Status window
1
3
A
B
C
423
Remote Operation 4
Neutral:
Phase A Phase B Phase C
(Amp Cycles)
Breaker Monitor Accumulators
Accumulator #1
Accumulator #2
Accumulator #3
Accumulator #4
Accumulator #5
Accumulator #6
Cycles
Cycles
Cycles
Cycles
Cycles
Cycles
Startup Time:
Frequency Accumulator Status
Figure 4-29 Accumulator Status Screen
70
60
50
40
30
20
-10
Circle Diameter
Circle Offset
1.00
0.10
Phase Impedances:
-0.80 -0.60 -0.40 -0.20 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80
10
X
Phase Distance
Circle Impedance Angle
AB:
BC:
CA:
Load Encr Angles:

Load Encr. R Reach:
X
Figure 4-30 Phase Distance Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phase Distance window
Phase Distance window shows a graphic representation of phase distance settings.
Move the scope window to the right
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Refresh Scope
CONTROL BUTTONS
Move up the scope window
Move down the scope window
Move the scope window to the left
1
3
A
B
C
424
10
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-0.80 -0.30 -20 -10 10 20 30 40
Circle Diameter:
Circle Offset:
Positive Sequence
Impedance :
X
Loss of Field
X
Directional Element
Figure 4-31 Loss of Field Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Loss of Field window
Loss-of-Field window shows a graphic representation of loss-of-field settings, and also displays the positive sequence
impedance.
CONTROL BUTTONS
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Refresh Scope
40
35
30
25
20
15
-10
Circle Diameter
Circle Offset
20.0 W
-0.80 -0.60 -0.40 -0.20 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80
10
X
Out of Step
Circle Impedance Angle
X
Blinder Impedance
Positive Sequence Impedance
Trip on Mho Exit
5
15.0 W
85
5.0 W
ENABLED
327.67 + j327.67 W
Figure 4-32 Out-of-Step Dialog
Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Out-of-Step window
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Refresh Scope
CONTROL BUTTONS
1
3
A
B
C
425
Remote Operation 4
Figure 4-33 Phasor Dialog Box
Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phasor Diagram window
CONTROL BUTTONS
p Voltage Toggle & display voltage channel information
p Currents (A) Toggle & display current channel information.
p Freeze Toggle & update information
Phase Angle: 23.1
o
Delta Volts: 0.4 V
Delta Freq: 0.023 Hz
Sync Scope
X
SLOW
FAST
330
300
270
240
210
180
150
120
90
60
30
0
Figure 4-34 Sync Scope Screen
1
3
A
B
C
426
P: Pickup T:Tripped
T P P T
Function Status
(21) #1 Phase Distance
(24DT) #1 Volts/Hz DEF
(24DT) #2 Volts/Hz DEF
(24IT) Volts/Hz INV
(27) #1 Phase Undervoltage
(25S) Sync Check
(25D) Dead Check
(27TN) #1 Third Harmonic Undervoltage
(27TN) #2 Third Harmonic Undervoltage
(32) #1 Directional Power
(40) #1 Loss of Field
(40) #2 Loss of Field
(40VC) #1 Loss of Field with VC
(40VC) #2 Loss of Field with VC
(46DT) Neg. Seq. Overcurrent DEF
(46IT) Neg. Seq. Overcurrent INV
(49) #1 Stator Overload
(49) #2 Stator Overload
(50BF) Breaker Failure
(50) #1 Phase Overcurrent
(50N) Instant. Neutral Overcurrent
(50DT) #1 Time Overcurrent
(50DT) #2 Time Overcurrent
(50/27) Inadvertent Energizing
(51N) Inv. Time Neu. Overcurrent
(51V) Inv. Time Phase Overcurrent
(59) #1 Phase Overvoltage
(59D) Third Harmonic Voltage Differential
(59N) #1 Neutral Overvoltage
(59X) #1 Multi-purpose Overvoltage
(59X) #2 Multi-purpose Overvoltage
(60FL) VT Fuse Loss
(64F) #1 Field Ground
(64F) #2 Field Ground
(64B) Brush Lift-Off
(64S) 100% Stator Ground
(67NDT) Residual Definite Overcurrent
(67NIT) Residual Inverse Overcurrent
(78) Out of Step
(81) #1 Frequency
(81) #2 Frequency
(81) #3 Frequency
(81) #4 Frequency
(81A) #1 Freq Accumulator
(81R) #1Rate of Change of Frequency
(81R) #2 Rate of Change of Frequency
(87) #1 Phase Differential Current
(87) #2 Phase Differential Current
(87GD) Ground Differential Current
(IPSL) #1 IPS LOGIC
(IPSL) #2 IPS LOGIC
(IPSL) #3 IPS LOGIC
(IPSL) #4 IPS LOGIC
(IPSL) #5 IPS LOGIC
(IPSL) #6 IPS LOGIC
(BM) Breaker Monitor
(TC) Trip Circuit Monitor
OUTPUT 17
OUTPUT 18
X
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 14
OUTPUT 7
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 15
OUTPUT 16
OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 23
OUTPUT 19
OUTPUT 20
OUTPUT 21
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT FL INPUT 13
INPUT 14
Figure 4-35 Function Status Screen
Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Function Status window
Function Status window shows the status of various functions, with T representing the function which has tripped, and P
representing the function which has picked up and is timing.
Path: Help menu / About... command
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Exits the currently displayed dialog box.
The Profile Info command will allow the user to view or make notations for the relay setpoint data files.
1
3
A
B
C
427
Remote Operation 4
4.5 Cautions
System and IPScom
Compatibility
Every attempt has been made to maintain
compatibility with previous software versions. In
some cases (most notably with older protection
systems), compatibility cannot be maintained. If
there is any question about compatibility, contact
the factory.
System Priority
System conflicts will not occur, as local commands
initiated from the front panel receive priority
recognition. When the unit is in local mode,
communication using the serial ports is suspended.
IPScom displays an error message to indicate this
fact.
Time and Date Stamping
Time and date stamping of events is only as useful
as the validity of the units internal clock. Under the
Relay menu, the Set Date/TIme command allows
you to manually set the units clock.
Echo Cancel
The Echo Cancel check box, under the Comm
menu, should only be used when several relays are
connected using a fiber optic loop network.
Otherwise, echo cancel must not be selected or
communication will be prevented.
Serial Port Connections
If the serial port is connected to something other
than a modem, and an IPScom modem command
is executed, the results are unpredictable. In some
cases, the computer may have to be reset.
1
3
A
B
C
428
4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard Shortcuts
SYSTEM KEYS
These keys can be used within Microsoft Windows
and IPScom
.
Alt-Tab To switch between applications.
Ctrl-Esc To open Task List dialog box. Opens Start Menu (Win 95/98).
Ctrl-Tab To switch between windows within an application.
Arrow Keys To select an application or group icon.
First Character of Name To select application or group icon.
Enter To open selected group or run selected application.
MENU KEYS
These keys enable you to select menus and choose commands.
Alt or F10 To select or cancel selection of the Setup menu on the menu bar.
Left Arrow, Right Arrow To move between menus.
Up Arrow, Down Arrow To move between commands.
A character key To choose the menu or command. The underlined character matches
the one you type.
Enter To choose the selected menu name or command.
Esc To cancel the selected menu name, or to close the open menu.
DIALOG BOX KEYS
These keys are useful when working in a dialog box.
Alt-a character key To move to the option or group whose underlined letter or number
matches the one you type.
Arrow Keys To move highlighted selections within list boxes.
Alt-Down Arrow To open a list.
Spacebar To select an item or cancel a selection in a list. Also to select or
clear a check box.
Enter To carry out a command.
Esc or Alt-F4 To close a dialog box without completing the command.
Table 4-3 Microsoft Windows Keyboard Shortcuts
1
3
A
B
C
429
Remote Operation 4
4.7 IPSutil Communications Software
Figure 4-36 IPSutil Main Menu Flow
M-3890 IPSutil
The M-3890 IPSutil Communication software package
provides communication with the Beckwith Integrated
Protection System
(IPS) for setting up the relays.

Its main purpose is to aid in setting up IPS relays
that are ordered without the optional front panel HMI
interface.
Installation and Setup
IPSutil runs with the Microsoft
Windows 95 operating
system or above. Hardware requirements are the
same as those stated for IPScom
.
Change Comm Access Code
Change Access Level Code
Help Miscellaneous Security Clock Relay Comm
Miscellaneous
Setup
Monitor Status
Calibration
Help
About...
Clock
RelayComm
Window
Connect
Exit Alt+F4
Comm
Security
IPSutility ( Relay M-3425A D-00XX VX.XX.XX )
Comm
Ethernet
Ethernet
1
3
A
B
C
430
Installation
An installation utility has been provided as a part of
IPScom
and IPSutil programs. After installation,

IPSutil can be run from the hard drive by choosing
IPSUTIL.EXE.
System Setup
Connect a null modem cable from COM1 of the
relay to the PC serial port. IPSutil supports COM1
port direct connection only. Modem connection is
not supported. IPSutil is not supported through
COM2 or COM3 ports of the relay.
Overview
IPSutil helps in setting up IPS relays which were
ordered without the optional front panel HMI interface.
Units delivered without HMIs are shipped with a set
of factory default settings for various parameters
that the end user may wish to change. While the
utility program is directed to users that do not have
HMI, users of HMI-provided relays can also use
IPSutil to set various parameters. When IPSutil is
started, a warning window appears:
IPSutility should NOT be used to set up the relay which is on-line because some
parameters modifications may result in unexpected operations. It is only for off-line relay
setup.
OK
WARNING X
Figure 4-37 Warning Message
After the user accepts the warning, the user can
access the IPSutil main menu. The following sections
describe each IPSutil menu items.
Comm Menu
Connect
Exit Alt+F4
Comm
The Comm menu allows the user to make
connections to the relay. This is the first command
the user must use to access the unit. After the user
sel ects the Connect submenu i tem, the
Communications dialog box appears (See Figure
4-41).
Select the correct PC communication port
where the null modem cable is connected
for the relay.
Select the baud rate of the relay. Factory
default is 9600 baud.
Select the access code resident in the
relay. Factory default is 9999.
Select Open com.
The following message window will be displayed
showing COM opened. Now, the title bar will display
the relay model and the software version.
X IPSutility
M-3425A
COM Opened
OK
The Exit submenu allows you to quit IPSutil. If the
relay was connected, this submenu disconnects
the relay. When the relay was connected, if you
have made any changes for some parameters (for
example, baud rate, phase rotation) the following
message window appears.
Some parameters changes require resetting the relay to become effective. Do you wish
to reset the relay now?
IPSUTILITY X
OK Cancel
Figure 4-38 IPSutility Reset Relay Message
Relay Comm Command
When Relay Comm command is selected, the
Relay Comm Port Settings dialog box appears (See
Figure 4-42). It allows you to set the relay
communication ports COM1 or COM2/COM3 baud
rate. For COM2/COM3, it allows you to set the
protocol and dead synch time. Additionally, for
COM2 and COM3, if you select MODBUS protocol,
the dialog box allows you to enable the parity
option.

NOTE: If COM1 baud rate is changed and the
relay is reset, the new baud rate must be
used to communicate with COM1
Ethernet Command
When the Ethernet command is selected, the
Ethernet Settings dialog box appears (see Figure
4-43.) This command allows the user to enable or
disable the ethernet connection and enable/set
protocols.
Clock Command
When the Clock command is selected, the Set
Unit Date/Time dialog box appears (See Figure
4-44). Date and Time can be changed and sent to
the relay. This dialog box allows you to start or stop
the clock in the relay.
1
3
A
B
C
431
Remote Operation 4
Security Menu
Security
Change Comm Access Code
Change Level Access Code
The Security Menu allows you to set the
communication access code and the level access
codes for the relay.
The Change Comm Access Code allows you to
assign new communication access code to the
relay. The range of the access code is 1 to 9999.
Note that the access code 9999 is a factory default
(See Figure 4-45).

NOTE: Setting the access code to 9999 disables
security.
The Change User Access Code allows you to
assign three different levels of access code for the
relay functions accessibility. The range of the level
access code is 1 to 9999 (See Figure 4-46).
CAUTION: This submenu allows you to change
the relay level access codes.
Miscellaneous Menu
Miscellaneous
Setup
Monitor Status
Calibration
The Miscellaneous menu allows you to set and
monitor some of the relay parameters.
The Setup command allows you to change the
users Logo information, test outputs, assign
communication address and user control number,
phase rotation, OK LED flash mode in the relay.
Note that the highest number used for the
communication address is 255 and the highest
control number allowed is 9999 (See Figure 4-47).
The Monitor Status command allows you to monitor
and clear the error code counters, monitor the check
sums, and to view inputs test status. Note that
powerloss counter cannot be cleared.
Monitor Status
Error Codes
Input Test Indicator
6 5 4 3 2 1
Open
Close
Checksums
Calibration: 94 Setpoints: 10
Clear
Last Selftest:
Last Selftest-1:
Last Selftest-2:
Last Selftest-3:
Last Comm:
Receive Packet:
Counters
Clear Counters (OUT1-OUT23):
Alarm:
Powerloss:
OUT1:
OUT2:
OUT3:
OUT4:
OUT5:
OUT6:
OUT7:
OUT8:
Alarm:
Powerloss:
147
110
8
0
18
22
27
7
0
42
45
28
0
0
4112
24
Extended Input Test Indicator
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
Open
Close
OUT13:
OUT14:
OUT15:
OUT16:
OUT17:
OUT18:
OUT19:
OUT21:
OUT 22:
OUT23:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OK Cancel
Clear Alarm
X
Figure 4-39 Monitor Status Screen
The Calibration command provides the user with
instructions to recalibrate Nominal Frequency, Third
Harmonic, (64F) Field Ground, and (64S) Stator
Protection.
Calibration
Select Calibration Procedures
Nominal Frequency
Third Harmonic
64F Field Ground
64S Stator Protection
Calibrate Cancel
Connect VN=VX=10.0 (+/- 0.01) and
VA=VB=VC=120.0 VAC at 180 Hz,
0 deg phase. Press Calibrate when ready.
X
Figure 4-40 Calibration Dialog
COMMAND BUTTONS
Calibrate Sends the currentl y di spl ayed
information to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window.
1
3
A
B
C
432
TCP/IP SETTINGS
EGD Protocol:
Ethernet Settings X
Ethernet:
DHCP Protocol: Enable Disable
Protocol Selection: MODBUS Serconv
Enable Disable
Enable Disable
IP Address:
Save Cancel
192 168 1 43
Net Mask:
255 255 255 0
Gateway: 0 0 0 0
Figure 4-43 Ethernet Settings
COMMAND BUTTONS
Ethernet Enable/Disable: Allows user to enable
and disable the Ehternet Port.
DHCP Protocol Enable/Disable: Allows the user
to enable or disable the DHCP protocol. When
DHCP protocol is enabled the the IP Address portion
of the screen is grayed out. When DHCP protocol is
disabled the IP Address can be manually entered.
EGD Protocol Enable/Disable: Not available.
Protocol Selection MODBUS/Serconv: Provides
the user with the ability to select either MODBUS
over TCP/IP or Serconv (BECO2200 over TCP\IP)
protocol.
Save Saves values to the relay.
Any changes to the di spl ayed
SET UNIT DATE/TIME
TIME SYNC
Stop Clock
Date:
Time:
12 / 15 / 98
20 : 01 : 01
Cancel Save
Figure 4-44 Set Unit Date/Time Dialog Box
Help Menu
Help
About...
Under Help, the About... submenu provides you
the information on the IPSUtil version numbers.
COM1
COMM X
PC Port
Access Code
Baud Rate
300
1200
4800
600
2400
9600
Open COM
Close COM
Cancel
Figure 4-41 Communication Dialog
COMMAND BUTTONS
Open COM Ini ti ates communi cati on wi th the
protecti ve system by di rect seri al
communication.
Close COM Discontinues communication with the
protective system.
COM1 Baud Rate: 9600
Communication Address: 1
COM2 Baud Rate: 9600
Relay Comm Port Settings X
Cancel OK
Stop Bit: 1 Bit 2 Bits
COM2
Dead Sync Time: 50 ms
1 ms 3000 ms
Beco 2200 MODBUS
Parity: None Even Odd
Stop Bit: 1 Bit 2 Bits
COM3
Dead Sync Time: 50 ms
1 ms 3000 ms
Beco 2200 MODBUS
Parity: None Even Odd
Figure 4-42 Relay Comm Port Settings
COMMAND BUTTONS
OK Sends the currentl y di spl ayed
1
3
A
B
C
433
Remote Operation 4
COMMAND BUTTONS
Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop the clock
of the relay. The Stop stops the clock in
the relay. The Start resumes the clock
in the relay.
Save When connected to the protection
system, the date and time information
on the display is sent to the relay.
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main
There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic on the Set Date/
Time dialog box (the LED is displayed as different
shading on a monochrome monitor). When this LED is
blue, the relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal
and the Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field
cant be changed. But the Date field can be changed
(by editing and pressing Save). When the LED is not
blue, the relay is not time-synchronized and therefore,
both the Date and Time fields can be changed. The
time field in the dialog box is not updated continuously.
The time at which the dialog box was opened is the
time that is displayed and remains as such. This is true
whether the relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal
or not.
Change Comm Access Code X
New Access Code:
Confirm New Access Code:
xxxx
xxxx
OK Cancel
Figure 4-45 Change Communication Access
Code Dialog Box
COMMAND BUTTONS
Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main
Change User Access Code X
New User Access Code:
Confirm New User Access Code:
OK Cancel
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Figure 4-46 Change User Access Code
Dialog Box
COMMAND BUTTONS
Setup
Output Test (Relay)
User Logo
Line1:
Line2:
M-3425A
User Control Number: 1
OK Cancel
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
X
Enable
ABC
Disable
ACB
OK LED Flash:
Phase Rotation:
Output Test (Relay) Extended
23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Figure 4-47 Setup Dialog Box
COMMAND BUTTONS

NOTE: Output Test is not available on some
versions of the M-3425A Relay.
1
3
A
B
C
434
Legal Information
Patent
The units described in this manual are covered by
U.S. Patents, with other patents pending.
Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify the Seller,
its directors, officers, agents, and employees from
any and all costs and expense, damage or loss,
resulting from any alleged infringementof United
States Letters Patent or rights accruing thereform or
trademarks, whether federal, state, or common law,
arising from the Sellers compliance with Buyers
designs, specifications, or instructions.
Warranty
Seller hereby warrants that the goods which are the
subject matter of this contract will be manufactured
in a good workmanlike manner and all materials
used herein will be new and reasonably suitable for
the equipment. Seller warrants that if, during a
period of five years from date of shipment of the
equipment, the equipment rendered shall be found
by the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform in
accordance with Sellers specifications of the
product, Seller shall at his expense correct the
same, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship the
equipment prepaid to Sellers facility. The Sellers
responsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace-
ment value of the equipment furnished under this
contract.
Seller makes no warranties expressed or implied
other than those set out above. Seller specifically
excludes the implied warranties of merchantibility
and fitness for a particular purpose. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the description
contained herein. In no event shall Seller be liable for
consequential, exemplary, or punitive damages of
whatever nature.
Any equipment returned for repair must be sent
with transportation charges prepaid. The equipment
must remain the property of the Buyer. The afore-
mentioned warranties are void if the value of the
unit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return.
Indemnification
The Seller shall not be liable for any property
damages whatsoever or for any loss or damage
arising out of, connected with, or resulting from
this contract, or from the performance or breach
thereof, or from all services covered by or furnished
under this contract.
In no event shall the Seller be liable for special,
incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages,
including but not limited to, loss of profits or
revenue, loss of use of the equipment or any
associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of
purchased power, cost of substitute equipment,
facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims or
damages of customers or employees of the Buyer
for such damages, regardless of whether said claim
or damages is based on contract, warranty, tort
including negligence, or otherwise.
Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liable
for any personal injury whatsoever.
It is agreed that when the equipment furnished
hereunder are to be used or performed in connec-
tion with any nuclear installation, facility, or
activity, Seller shall have no liability for any
nuclear damage, personal injury, property damage,
or nuclear contamination to any property located at
or near the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agrees
to indemnify and hold harmless the Seller against
any and all liability associated therewith whatso-
ever whether based on contract, tort, or otherwise.
Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclear
reactor and includes the site on which any of the
foregoing is located, all operations conducted on
such site, and all premises used for such opera-
tions.
Notice:
Any illustrations and descriptions by Beckwith
Electric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose of
identification.
The drawings and/or specifications enclosed herein
are the proprietary property of Beckwith Electric
Co., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence;
therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc-
tion of the apparatus described therein without
written permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
No illustration or description contained herein
shall be construed as an express warranty of
affirmation, promise, description, or sample, and
any and all such express warranties are specifically
excluded nor shall such illustration or description
imply a warranty that the product is merchantable
or fit for a particular purpose. There shall be no
warranties which extend beyond those contained in
the Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale.
All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approval
of the Company.
I
S
O
9
0
0
1
:
2
0
0
0
R
e
g
i
s
t
e
r
e
d
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.
6190 - 118th Avenue North Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.
PHONE (727) 544-2326 FAX (727) 546-0121
E-MAIL [email protected]
WEB PAGE www.beckwithelectric.com
2004 Beckwith Electric Co.
Printed in USA
800-3425A-IB-04MC2 07/08

Generator Protection Relay

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Generator Protection Relay

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Generator Protection Relay

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Book

for Generators of All Sizes

Communications Software provides simple and logical

PLUS Oscillograph Analy-

Phase Distance (three-zone mho characteristic)

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Negative Sequence Overcurrent

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Residual Directional Overcurrent

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Select the greater of these accuracy values.

Communications Software. IPSlogic takes the contact

Menu Selections ................................................................ 46

Dialog Box ............................................................. 421

Error Messages ................................................................. C2

Communications Software or other means.

Communications Software. The module allows local

95 or later. When properly

PLUS Oscillograph Analysis

Communi cati ons Software on any IBM

Communications Software (see Chapter

main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

will display the Expanded

Communications Software. The

There are four initiating input sources: Initiating

Access Screens (optional)

Communications Software. Once

PLUS Oscillograph Data Analysis Software.

Communications Software ........................................ 429

program. It is used exclusively

is run, a menu and status bar is

main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Software

windows so that there is

Load Encr Angles:

(IPS) for setting up the relays.

and IPSutil programs. After installation,

You might also like